Strata DK24/56/96 Programming Manual

PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 1, 2, 3, and 4
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
Chapter One
INTRODUCTION
D96-SR-SYSRECR4
4010908
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
2
2.10
2.20
3
3.10
3.20
3.30
3.40
4
4.10
4.20
4.30
SUBJECT
PURPOSE ...................................................................................................
ORGANIZATION .........................................................................................
Chapter One—Introduction (Section 400-096-301) ...............................
Chapter Two—System Record Sheets and Instructions
(Section 400-096-302) ...........................................................................
GENERAL PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS...........................................
Programming Data Entry Overview .......................................................
Programming Data Variations ................................................................
Preparing the System for Programming ................................................
General Programming Procedures ........................................................
INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM .......................................................................
Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 Data With Program 90................................
Initialize Speed Dial Numbers, Voice Mail Identification Codes,
Character Message Memory, Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone
Volume, and Call Forward Backup Memory With Program 92 ..............
After Initialization....................................................................................
PAGE
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-6
TABLE LIST
TABLE
1-A
1-B
1-C
1-D
1-E
1-F
1-G
SUBJECT
SIMPLE PROGRAM: PROGRAM 33 (STATION HUNTING) .....................
MULTIDIMENSIONAL PROGRAM: PROGRAM 30 (STATION
CLASS OF SERVICE) ................................................................................
PROGRAM 90/INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 ..................................
PROGRAM 92/INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, VM ID CODES,
CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL
TELEPHONE VOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD BACKUP MEMORY ......
PROGRAM 03/FLEXIBLE PCB SLOT ASSIGNMENTS.............................
PROGRAM 00/SOFTWARE CHECK AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE
SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENTS ...........................................................
PROGRAM 04/PORT AND STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENTS ............
PAGE
1-3
1-4
1-7
1-9
1-11
1-12
1-14
FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
SUBJECT
PROGRAMMING BUTTON SEQUENCE OVERVIEW...............................
INITIALIZING DATA FOR PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 WITH PROGRAM 90 .....
INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, VM ID CODES, CHARACTER
MESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL TELEPHONE
VOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD BACKUP MEMORY
WITH PROGRAM 92 ..................................................................................
SETTING SYSTEM DATE ..........................................................................
SETTING SYSTEM TIME ...........................................................................
SETTING SYSTEM DAY OF WEEK ...........................................................
-i-
PAGE
1-2
1-8
1-10
1-15
1-15
1-15
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
step process described below and illustrated in
Figure 1-1. Button (key) sequences that stay the
same for every program are abbreviated and shaded
on each record sheet. Button sequences that are
unique for every program are white.
1 PURPOSE
1.01 The purpose of this programming section is to
provide the system installer with instructions to set
the detailed feature configuration and operation of
the system.
1) In Step 1, enter the programming mode by
pressing a series of buttons. To save space on
the record sheets, abbreviation “A” is used to
denote the beginning sequence. “A” buttons are
shaded.
1.02 This chapter provides an overview of the
programming section, its organization, and its general programming instructions.
1.03 For easy reference, every paragraph is numbered.
2) In Step 2, enter the program number. This
sequence is unique for every program. The
buttons are white and never abbreviated.
2 ORGANIZATION
3) In Step 3, enter the program data. Again, this
sequence is unique for every program. The
buttons are white and never abbreviated. To
make another entry, repeat Step 3 until ready to
exit the current program.
2.01 This programming section is organized in
modular chapters, which are titled as follows:
2.10 Chapter One—Introduction (Section 400096-301): Begins with an overview of the section’s
purpose and organization. Also included are basic
instructions on how to program the system with a
20-button LCD digital or electronic telephone, some
general programming notes, and a description of
system initialization.
4) In Step 4, exit the current program. This sequence never changes. To save space on the
record sheets, abbreviation “Z” is used to denote this sequence. “Z” buttons are shaded.
Upon exiting the current program, repeat Step 2
to enter another program, or continue with step
5 to exit the programming mode entirely.
2.20 Chapter Two—System Record Sheets and
Instructions (Section 400-096-302): Provides a
record sheet for every program (00 ~ 97), including
Toll Restriction and Least Cost Routing, and instructions on how to fill them out. The system
programmer programs the system from the data on
the record sheets. Program cross-reference tables
in numerical and alphabetical order are also included.
5) In Step 5, exit the programming mode by pressing the same buttons as in Step 4. This sequence also never changes.
3.12 Each System Record Sheet has the abbreviated button sequence shown in Figure 1-1 for its
program illustrated at the top of the sheet.
3 GENERAL PROGRAMMING
INSTRUCTIONS
3.20 Programming Data Variations
3.21 There are two different ways to enter data in
Step 3 (Figure 1-1) of a program: pressing the
buttons on the dialpad and pressing the LED buttons. Many programs are multidimensional and
involve both types of entry.
3.01 General Programming Instructions provide
an overview of system programming considerations. Data is entered from System Record Sheets
at the 20-button LCD digital or electronic telephone
connected to Port 05. System Record Sheets document a specific system’s data configuration, including attributes of a feature or group of features. The
record sheets are organized by program number.
3.22 Simple Programs: Simple programs, such
as Program 33, only require data to be specified
through the dialpad. Data entered from the dialpad
displays on the programming digital or electronic
telephone’s LCD, along with prompts and confirmations. See Table 1-A for step-by-step data entry
instructions for Program 33.
3.10 Programming Data Entry Overview
3.11 Keystrokes for entering data from System
Record Sheets follow a pattern, consisting of a five-
1-1
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
another program
more data
SPKR
*
#
*
Step 1
Enter Program Mode
#
SPKR
HOLD
Step 2
Enter Program Number
SPKR
HOLD
SPKR
Step 3
Enter Program Data
#
# HOLD
SPKR
Step 4
Exit Current Program
#
# HOLD
Step 5
Exit Program Mode
#
A
S
H
S
and/or
H
Z
Z
(LED buttons)
and/or
FIGURE 1-1—PROGRAMMING BUTTON SEQUENCE OVERVIEW
3.24 Programming Button/LED Buttonstrip
Template: A special buttonstrip template is placed
over the 20 flexible feature buttons of the programming telephone. The template assigns numbers to
each of the 20 buttons that correspond with tables
found on the System Record Sheets for programming purposes. The record sheets include assignments for on-hook programming, to identify programming LED buttons 01 ~ 20; and assignments
for off-hook programming, to identify CO line programming LED buttons 21 ~ 36 (shaded). Templates are supplied with each manual.
3.23 Multidimensional Programs: Once a program number is entered, the first dimension (usually a CO line number, a station port number, or a
range of ports) must be specified. Upon specifying
this first dimension on the dialpad, programming
button LEDs 01 ~ 20 light in the default configuration. The status of each LED can be changed by
pressing its associated button. Pressing the button
while its LED is lit turns the LED off; pressing the
button while its LED is off turns the LED on. Program 30 is a multidimensional program; see Table
1-B for step-by-step data entry instructions for
Program 30.
• Range Programming: When programming a
range of station ports, the station’s programming LEDs indicate whether the data programmed matches for all items in the range:
§ LED On: Indicates that all ports in the range
are programmed with the data choice that
lights the particular LED.
§ LED Off: Indicates that all ports in the range
are programmed with the data choice that
does not light the particular LED.
§ LED Flashing: Indicates that data is currently inconsistent for all ports in the range.
Some may be programmed with the LED
on; some with the LED off.
3.30 Preparing the System for Programming
3.31 This section explains how to prepare a system for programming, including minimum hardware requirements and directions to clear the
system’s memory.
3.32 Minimum Hardware Requirements: A system must have the following minimum hardware
installed for programming, as described in the
installation section, Section 400-096-200:
• Power Supply: The power supply must test
satisfactorily.
1-2
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-A
SIMPLE PROGRAM: PROGRAM 33
(STATION HUNTING)
Step
#
1.
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone
connected to port 05 - circuit 6.
JAN
20
NO. 205
06:43
SUN
Make sure the programming button strip template is
installed on the programming telephone (see
Paragraph 3.24).
2.
3.
4.
5.
Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
PROGRAM MODE
Spkr 3 3 Hold
Access Program 33. System beeps after Spkr key
is pressed to indicate program number may be entered.
PROGRAM = 33
Spkr
Prepare the system for a station port selection.
33 SELECT =
00#~95#
Select the port number of the Hunt From station. A
range of ports can be entered as specified in on the
record sheet. After the Hunt From ports are entered,
press the # button.
DATA STORE
33 SELECT = (00 ~ 95)
HUNT TO =
00~95
Enter the port number of the Hunt To point, as recorded
on the system record sheet. Press LED key 01 to delete
a digit from Hunt To point ports.
33 SELECT = (00 ~ 95)
HUNT TO = (00 ~ 95)
7.
Hold
Secure data in system programming.
33 SELECT = (00 ~ 95)
DATA PROGRAMMED
8.
Spkr
Prepare system for another selection (go back to
step 5), or exit Program 33 (continue with step 9).
33 SELECT =
9.
# # Hold
Secure Program 33 data in system memory.
33 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
10.
Spkr
Exit Program 33. Enter another program number or
exit programming mode (go to step 11).
Speaker beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 33.
PROGRAM =
11.
# # Hold
Exit programming mode.
NO. 205
JAN 20
6.
SUN
06:58
NOTE:
The button designations above are for 2000-series digital telephones. The 1000-series digital telephone
equivalents are Hold and Speaker. The 6500-series electronic telephone equivalents are Hold and Spkr.
1-3
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-B
MULTIDIMENSIONAL PROGRAM: PROGRAM 30
(STATION CLASS OF SERVICE)
Step
#
1.
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
Use the programming LCD digital or electronic
telephone connected to port 05 (station 205) - circuit 6.
JAN
NO.
20
205
06:43
SUN
Make sure the programming button strip template is
installed on the programming telephone (see
Paragraph 3.24).
2.
Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
PROGRAM MODE
3.
Spkr 3 0 Hold
Access Program 30. System beeps after Spkr
key is pressed to indicate a program number may
be entered.
PROGRAM = 30
4.
Spkr
Prepare system for a port number selection.
30 SELECT =
5.
00#~95#
Enter the port number where the station being defined
is connected. Use two digits, followed by a # key.
A range of ports may be entered at once by using the
* key. (See Note on system record sheet.)
30 SELECT = (00 ~ 95)
6.
LED keys 01 ~ 20
LED keys 01 ~ 20 activate features for each station port
or port range. Make the following selections by turing
the appropriate key led ON or OFF for each item (01 ~
20) for each port, as marked on the system record
sheet:
LED 01: Speakerphone Enabled.
LED 02: Microphone Key Lock Enabled.
LED 03: Microphone ON at Start of Call.
LED 04: Not Used.
LED 05: Speed Dial Allowed.
LED 06: Automatic Busy Redial Access Enabled.
LED 07: Automatic Off-hook Call Announce.
LED 08: Forced Account Code Enabled.
LED 09: Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
Authority
LED 10: DISA Security Code Change Allowed
LED 11: Dial Pulse (DTMF Off) for Standard
Telephone
1-4
DATA STORE
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-B (continued)
MULTIDIMENSIONAL PROGRAM: PROGRAM 30,
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
Step
#
6.
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
LED keys 01 ~ 20 (continued)
LED 12 and 13: Digital Telephone Handset Receiver
Volume (Release 3).
LED 14: Account Codes Verified (Release 3).
LED 15: Verified Account Code Revision Authority
(Release 3)
LED 16: Traveling Class of Service Code Revision
Authority (Release 3).
LED 17: Do Not Disturb Override Allowed.
LED 18: Executive Override Allowed.
LED 19: Privacy Overrided Allowed
LED 20: Not Used
If programming a port range, the LED indications are
as follows:
• LED-ON, all ports in range are enabled for that
item.
• LED-OFF, all ports in range are disabled for that
item.
• LED-FLASHING, some ports in range are enabled
and some ports are disabled.
7.
Hold
Secure data in system programming.
30 SELECT = (00 ~ 95)
DATA PROGRAMMED
8.
Spkr
Prepare system for another selection (go back to
step 5), or exit Program 30 (continue with step 9).
30 SELECT =
9.
# # Hold
Secure Program 30 data in system memory.
30 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
10.
Spkr
Exit Program 30. Enter another program number (see
Table Q), or exit programming mode (go to step 11).
System beeps to indicate it is exiting Program 30.
PROGRAM =
11.
# # Hold
Exit programming mode.
NO.
JAN
205
20 SUN
06:58
NOTE:
The button designations above are for 2000-series digital telephones. The 1000-series digital telephone
equivalents are Hold and Speaker. The 6500-series electronic telephone equivalents are Hold and Spkr.
1-5
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
• PCTU or PCTUS (Common Control Unit PCB):
5) From an LCD telephone equipped with a programming template connected to Port 05 , enter
data from the record sheets. For help in entering
this data, see example Tables 1-A and 1-B in
this chapter.
A PCTU or PCTUS must be installed and have
its jumpers set for live operation.
• PDKU, PEKU, or PESU.
• LCD program telephone equipped with programming template connected to Port 05.
6) Set the date, time, and day from an LCD telephone connected to Port 00 (Figures 1-4 ~ 1-6).
3.33 Minimum Software Requirements: To prepare the system software for programming, clear
the memory by initializing its data (with Programs
90 and 92), as specified in Paragraph 4, Initializing
the System. Next, Program 03 must be completed
to inform the software of the system’s hardware
configuration. Basic system programming can then
begin.
4 INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM
4.01This section explains how to prepare the system software for programming. The system's
memory must be cleared by initializing its data.
Initializing data activates standard data assignments (stored in ROM).
3.40 General Programming Procedures
4.10Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 Data with Program 90: Always initialize a system with Program
90 when it is first installed or when its software must
be brought to the default configuration. If only minor
programming changes are being added to a system in which the programming is basically correct,
skip this section. Follow the steps in Table 1-C and
Figure 1-2 to run Program 90.
3.41 The general procedure for programming a
system follows:
1) Programs 90 and 92 must be run to initialize the
system; this sets the following elements to initial
status:
• Data for Programs 00 ~ 97
• Speed Dial Memory
• Voice Mail Identification Codes
• Character Message Memory
• Timed Reminders
• Digital Telephone Volume Levels
• Call Forward Memory (POWER OFF, then
ON).
1) Ensure that the system meets minimum hardware requirements specified in Paragraph 3.32.
2) Place the system power switch in the ON position.
3) Follow the steps in Table 1-C.
4.20Initialize Speed Dial Numbers, Voice Mail
Identification Codes, Character Message
Memory, Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone
Volume, and Call Forward Backup Memory with
Program 92
2) Program 03 must be run to inform the software
of the system hardware configuration.(POWER
OFF, then ON after running Program 03.)
4.21Complete this step if the system is being
installed for the first time, or when all currently
programmed speed dial numbers or the like must
be deleted. Follow the steps in Table 1-D and refer
to Figure 1-3.
3) Run Program 19-1 to assign the BGM slot; if
BGM is not connected to a PEKU, PESU or
PSTU, Program 19-1 must be run to assign slot
01 for BGM source connection. This will prevent
corrupted data from causing a misoperation of
PSTU ports (R4 only). Assigning BGM to slot 01
will not affect EKT or DKT stations connected to
PEKU or PDKU circuits in slot 01.
4.30After Initialization
4.31Immediately after initializing the system, Program 03 and Program 19-1 must be run to inform
the software of the system hardware configuration
(see Table 1-E, Program 19 record sheet), Program 00 to assign remote maintenance security
codes and to check the system software level (see
Table 1-F); and Program 04 to assign station
numbers (see Table 1-G).
4) Ensure that the Basic System Record SHEETS,
Toll Restriction System Record Sheets, and
Least Cost Routing System Record Sheets have
been filled out. If they have been filled out,
proceed to Step 4. If not, determine the
customer's hardware/software configuration and
continue with Step 3.
1-6
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-C
PROGRAM 90
INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97
See Program 90 System Record Sheet
Press...
Step BUTTONS + LED keys
# Action description
1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone with
programming template connected to port 05 (station 205)
- circuit 6.
LCD RESPONSE ...
JAN
20
NO. 205
06:30
SUN
2.
Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
PROGRAM MODE
3.
Spkr 9 0 HOLD
Access Program 90. System beeps after Spkr
button is pressed to indicate the program number
can be entered.
PROGRAM = 90
4.
Spkr
Prepare system for the programs to be initialized.
90 SELECT =
5.
0 0 * 9 7 + LED keys 01 & 02
Enter program numbers individually or in a range.
For a range, separate the low program number and
the high program number with an asterisk.
90 SELECT = 00*97
DATA CLR
6.
Hold
Secure data in system programming. LEDs 01 and 02 flash.
90 SELECT = 00*97
DATA PROGRAMMED
7.
Spkr
Prepare system for another selection (go back to
step 5), or exit Program 90 (continue with step 8).
90 SELECT =
8.
# # Hold
Secure Program 90 data in system memory.
90 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
9.
Spkr
Exit Program 90. Enter another program number (see
Table 1-D), or exit programming mode (go to step 10).
System beeps to indicate it's exiting Program 90.
PROGRAM =
10.
# # Hold
Exit programming mode.
DATA STORE
JAN
20
SUN
NO. 205
06:42
NOTE:
The system will not allow the Spkr
LED to light to reenter the programming mode.
11.
If all programs or just Program 32 were initialized above,
POWER OFF for 5 seconds then POWER ON.
This resets Station 205 auto preference to select
intercom when Spkr key is pressed.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Always initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 when installing a PCTU or PCTUS1
that is being installed for the first time for a particular configuration.
NOTE:
The button designations above are for 2000-series digital telephones. The 1000-series digital telephone
equivalents are Hold and Speaker. The 6500-series electronic telephone equivalents are Hold and Spkr.
1-7
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
EXIT programming mode
A
S
9
0
Enter programming mode
H
S
01
*
02
Program(s) to be initialized
H
Z
END Program 90
Button 1 and 2 LEDs must be lit
Z
If all programs
or just Program
32 are
initialized,
POWER OFF
for 5 sec. then
POWER ON
Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 every time:
• Installing a new system
• To bring a system's programming back to the default setting.
Specify the range as follows:
To initialize one program at a time, enter just the individual program number, then #.
FIGURE 1-2—INITIALIZING DATA FOR PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 WITH PROGRAM 90
4.32 Anytime after initialization, the time and date
can be set. This is not accomplished from the
programming station, but rather from the digital or
electronic telephone connected to Port 00 (usually
station number 200). Refer to Figures 1-4 for the
date, 1-5 for the system time, and 1-6 for the day of
the week (Monday, Tuesday, etc.).
4.33 All programs are entered from the LCD digital
or electronic telephone connected to Port 05.
1-8
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-D
INITIALIZATION PROGRAM 92
INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, VM ID CODES, CHARACTER MESSAGE
MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD
Press...
BACKUP MEMORY
Step
#
1.
2.
3.
4.
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone
with programming template connected to port 05 (station
205) - circuit 6.
Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
System beeps after Spkr button is pressed to indicate
when to enter program number.
Spkr 9 2 Hold
Access Program 92.
Spkr
Prepare system for selection of programs to initialize.
For new system installation perform all 1 ~ 4.
Select one of the following.
5. A 1 + LED keys 01 & 03
Clears station speed dial, voice mail ID codes, and LCD
memos assigned to station speed dial numbers.
OR
B 2 + LED keys 01 & 04
Clears system speed dial and LCD memos assigned to
system speed dial numbers.
OR
C 3 + LED keys 02 & 03
Clears character message memory (station and system)
and user name display.
OR
D 4 + LED keys 02 & 04
Clears timed reminders.
OR
E 5 + LED keys 01 & 05
Presets the Ring/Speaker, Mute Ring, and Intercom
Tone/BGM, volume levels of all digital telephones
to approximately midrange (Release 3 and higher).
OR
F 9 + LED keys 03 & 04
Clears Call Forward Memory except Fixed Call Forward
Memory ( Release 2 and higher).
JAN
20
NO. 205
06:43
SUN
PROGRAM MODE
PROGRAM = 92
DATA STORE
92 SELECT =
92 SELECT = 1
EACH DIAL CLR
92 SELECT = 2
COMMON DIAL CLR
92 SELECT = 3
MSG CLR
92 SELECT = 4
TMR REMINDER CLR
92 SELECT = 5
DKT VR INITIAL
92 SELECT = 9
BACK UP RAM CLR
6.
Hold
Secure data in system programming. Repeat steps 4 ~ 6
until steps 5A ~ 5F are completed (see note).
92 SELECT = (1~0)
DATA PROGRAMMED
7.
Spkr
Prepare system for another selection (go back to
step 5), or exit Program 92 (continue with step 8).
92 SELECT =
8.
# # Hold
Secure Program 92 data in system memory.
9.
Spkr
Exit Program 92. Enter another program number (see
Table C), or exit programming mode (go to step 10).
System beeps to indicate it's exiting Program 92.
92 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
PROGRAM =
10.
# # Hold
Exit programming mode.
JAN
20
SUN
NO. 205
06:58
NOTES:
1. The button designations above are for 2000-series digital telephones. The 1000-series digital telephone
equivalents are Hold and Speaker. The 6500-series electronic telephone equivalents are Hold and
Spkr.
2. If the call forward memory was cleared, cycle system power after Step 6, if it is required to reset telephone
1-9
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
more data
A
S
9
2
H
S
H
Z
Z
Enter programming mode
END Program 92
SELECT = (as below)
Specify if initializing Station Autodial,
System Autodial,Character Message
Memory or Timed Reminders:
EXIT programming
mode
1
01
03
Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID Codes,
and LCD memos Assigned to Station Speed Dial numbers.
2
01
04
Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to
System Speed Dial numbers.
3
02
03
Clears Character Message Memory (Station and System).
4
02
04
Clears Timed Reminders.
5
01
05
Initialize Digital Telephone Ring/Speaker, Mute Ring,
and Intercom Tone/BGM volume levels (Release 3 and higher).
9
03
04
H
Power OFF 5
seconds; then
Power ON
Clears Call Forward Memory
(all stations, Release 2 and higher).
FIGURE 1-3—INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, VM ID CODES, CHARACTER
MESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS, DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME, AND CALL
FORWARD BACKUP MEMORY WITH PROGRAM 92
1-10
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-E
PROGRAM 03
FLEXIBLE PCB SLOT ASSIGNMENTS
Step
#
1.
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone
with programming template connected to port 05 (station
205) - circuit 6.
JAN
20
2.
Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
PROGRAM MODE
3.
Spkr 0 3 HOLD
Access Program 03. After Spkr key is pressed, system
beeps to indicate program number may be entered.
PROGRAM = 03
Spkr
Prepare system for a selection.
Dial a PCB slot number (00~14) using the dial.
03 SELECT =
4.
5.
The system defaults as follows:
00
Initialized data assigns slot 00 to be a non-optioned
PCTU without CRCU.
01
Initialized data assigns slot 01 to be a non-optioned
PEKU without door phone, DSS console or OCA.
02~14
Initialized data assigns slots 02 ~ 14 to be empty.
NO. 205
06:43
SUN
DATA STORE
03 SELECT = (00 ~ 14)
CARD = (91, 21 or 00)
03 SELECT = 00
SLOT NUMBER
CARD = 91
03 SELECT = 01
SLOT NUMBER
CARD = 21
03 SELECT = (02 ~ 14)
CARD = 00
SLOT NUMBER
6.
00~93
Dial the PCB code recorded on the record sheet.
Refer to the PCB code reference table on Program 03
System Record Sheet for a definition of the codes.
03 SELECT = (00 ~ 14)
CARD = (00 ~ 93)
7.
Hold
Secure data in system programming.
03 SELECT = (00 ~ 14)
DATA PROGRAMMED
8.
Spkr
Prepare system for another selection (go back to
step 5), or exit Program 03 (continue with step 9).
03 SELECT =
9.
# # Hold
Secure Program 03 data in system memory.
03 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
10.
Spkr
Exit Program 03. Enter another program number (see
Table E), or exit programming mode (go to step 11).
System beeps to indicate it's exiting Program 03.
PROGRAM =
11.
# # Hold
Exit programming mode.
NO. 205
JAN 20
12.
SUN
06:58
In order to secure Program 03 entries, POWER OFF
for 5 seconds, then POWER ON.
NOTE:
The button designations above are for 2000-series digital telephones. The 1000-series digital telephone
equivalents are Hold and Speaker. The 6500-series electronic telephone equivalents are Hold and Spkr.
1-11
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-F
PROGRAM 00
SOFTWARE CHECK AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENTS
Step
#
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone
with programming template connected to port 05 (station
205) - circuit 6.
1.
LCD RESPONSE ...
JAN
20
2.
Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
PROGRAM MODE
3.
Spkr 0 0 Hold
Speaker beeps to indicate when to enter program
number. Access Program 00.
PROGRAM = 00
Spkr
Prepare system for a selection.
00 SELECT =
4.
5.
Select one of the following attributes:
A. 0
View the software version. This attribute is not editable.
OR
B. 1
Define the Level 1 remote maintenance security code
from the System Record Sheet (four digit max.). Level 1
allows remote access to all programs and data.
Default Level 1 security code is "0000."
OR
C. 2
Define the Level 2 remote maintenance security code
from the System Record Sheet (four digit max.). Level 2
allows remote entry to Programs 30 ~ 39 and 77 ~ 89
only. Default Level 2 security is "0000."
OR
D. 8
View the software RAM Checksum. This attribute is not
editable. The default checksum may change.
OR
E. 9
View the PPSU Power Cycle Counter. This attribute is
not editable. The counter indicates the number of times
power is removed from the system after Program 00
was initialized via Program 90.
NO. 205
06:43
SUN
DATA STORE
00 SELECT = 0
• DX
= PCTU1 OR PCTU2 VERSION
• DV
= PCTUS VERSION
• PCMX
= PCTU3 VERSION
• PCPX
= PCTU4 VERSION
NOTE:
= THE ACTUAL VERSION
NUMBER AND LETTER
00 SELECT = 1
PASSWORD = 0000
00 SELECT = 2
PASSWORD = 0000
00 SELECT = 8
SUM = XXXXXXXXX
00 SELECT = 9
COUNTER = XXXX
6.
Hold
Secure data in system programming.
(Only works for “1” and “2”)
00 SELECT = (0,1,2,8 or 9)
DATA PROGRAMMED
7.
Spkr
Prepare system for another selection (go back to
1-12
step 5), or exit Program 00 (continue with step 8).
00 SELECT =
NOTE:
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-F (Continued)
PROGRAM 00
SOFTWARE CHECK AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENTS
Step
#
8.
9.
10.
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
# # HOLD
Secure Program 00 data in system memory.
00 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
SPKR
Exit Program 00. Enter another program number (see
Table D), or exit programming mode (go to step 10).
System beeps to indicate it's exiting Program 00.
PROGRAM =
# # HOLD
Exit programming mode.
NO. 205
JAN 20
1-13
SUN
06:58
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 1-G
PROGRAM 04
PORT/STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
Step
#
Press...
BUTTONS + LED keys
Action description
LCD RESPONSE ...
1. Use the programming LCD electronic or digital telephone
with programming template connected to port 05 (station
205) - circuit 6.
JAN
20
2. Spkr * # * #
Enter programming mode.
PROGRAM MODE
3. Spkr 0 4 Hold
Access Program 04. System beeps after Spkr
is pressed to indicate a program number may be entered.
PROGRAM = 04
4. Spkr
Prepare system for a selection.
5. 0 0 # ~ 9 5 #
Select the number of the port (use two digits).
Initialized data assigns station numbers 200 ~ 295.
04 SELECT =
6.
Enter the port's station number from the record
sheet (four digits max.).
NOTE:
Station numbers must not exceed four digits, or
conflict with feature access codes listed in Program
05 System Record Sheet.
NO. 205
06:43
SUN
DATA STORE
04 SELECT = 00
INT = 200
04 SELECT = 00 ~ 95
INT = XXXX
7. Hold
Secure data in system programming.
04 SELECT = (00 ~ 95)
DATA PROGRAMMED
8. Spkr
Prepare system for another port selection (go back
to step 5), or exit Program 04 (continue with step 8).
04 SELECT =
9. # # Hold
Secure Program 04 data in system memory.
04 SELECT = ##
DATA PROGRAMMED
10. Spkr
Exit Program 04. Enter another program number (see
Table F), or exit programming mode (go to step 10).
System beeps to indicate it's exiting Program 04.
PROGRAM =
11. # # Hold
Exit programming mode.
NO. 205
JAN 20
SUN
06:58
NOTE:
The button designations above are for 2000-series digital telephones. The 1000-series digital telephone
equivalents are Hold and Speaker. The 6500-series electronic telephone equivalents are Hold and Spkr.
1-14
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INTRODUCTION
SECTION 400-096-301
SEPTEMBER 1992
HOW TO SET THE DATE
The date must be set from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to Port 00 (station 200).
Press the following button sequence with the handset on the hook:
Intercom
Could be INT on
some telephones
6
5
1
Redial
Date in year/month/day
format (YYMMDD). If month
or day is a single digit, precede
with a zero (0).
Could be REDIAL
or RDL on some
telephones.
Electronic telephones without
the RDL button can press #, instead
FIGURE 1-4—SETTING SYSTEM DATE
HOW TO SET THE TIME
The time must be set from the electronic telephone or digital assigned to Port 00 (station 200).
Press the following button sequence with the handset on the hook:
Intercom
6
5
Redial
2
Could be INT on
some telephones Time in hours/minutes/seconds
format (HHMMSS from 000000
to 235959). If any of these values
is a single digit, precede with a
zero (0).
Could be REDIAL
or RDL on some
telephones.
Electronic telephones without
the RDL button can press #, instead
FIGURE 1-5—SETTING SYSTEM TIME
HOW TO SET THE DAY
The day must be set from the electronic or digital telephone assigned to Port 00 (station 200).
Press the following button sequence with the handset on the hook:
Intercom
Could be INT on
some telephones
6
5
Enter the digit for today's day:
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
3 = Tuesday
4 = Wednesday
5 = Thursday
6 = Friday
7 = Saturday
3
Redial
Could be REDIAL
or RDL on some
telephones.
Electronic telephones without
the RDL button can press #, instead
FIGURE 1-6—SETTING SYSTEM DAY OF WEEK
1-15
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 1, 2, 3, and 4
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
Chapter Two
INSTRUCTIONS/RECORD SHEETS
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES:
These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation.
1. Set PCTU or PCTUS jumper for BATTERY OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed customer
data will be lost on power down.
2. Place PEPU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB in highest slot number of KSU.
3. Place all other PCBs in KSU from lowest slot number to highest in the following order:
PCTU or PCTUS (always slot 00)
PEKU or PDKU (starting at Slot 01)
PESU
PSTU
PCOU
PEMU
4. Run Program 90. Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97, and turn power OFF for 5 seconds, then turn
power back ON.
5. Run Program 92.
6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming mode, and turn
power OFF for 5 seconds, then turn power back ON.
WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs:
1. Move PEMU PCBs to a higher slot number to create empty slots for additions.
2. Install new PCBs and reprogram with Program 03 (turn power OFF for 5 seconds, then turn
back ON). Change PEMU station and CO line numbers or reassign stations.
3. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions.
-i-
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH
1
1.10
1.20
2
3
3.00
3.10
4
4.10
4.20
4.30
4.40
4.50
4.60
4.70
4.80
4.90
4.100
5
6
6.00
6.20
7
7.10
7.20
7.30
7.40
SUBJECT
IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES ..........................................
GENERAL ...................................................................................................
Record Sheet Data Entry ........................................................................
Basic System Record Instructions ..........................................................
TOLL RESTRICTION ..................................................................................
TOLL RESTRICTION OVERVIEW .............................................................
Toll Restriction Methods .........................................................................
Toll Restriction Features .........................................................................
COMPLETING THE TOLL RESTRICTION SYSTEM RECORD ................
Program 44B—Toll Restriction/Traveling Class Override Codes ...........
Program 45-1—Toll Restriction Dial Plan ...............................................
Program 45-2—Toll Restriction Disable .................................................
Program 45-3 ~ 6—Equal Access/Special Common Carrier Numbers
and Authorization Code Digit Length ......................................................
Program 45-8 ~ 9—Toll Restriction Override Code ................................
Program 46-2 ~ 4—Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes
Assigned by Class ..................................................................................
Program 46-6 ~ 8—Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Office Codes
Assigned by Class ..................................................................................
Program 46-10 ~ 40—Toll Restriction Class Parameters
(Classes 1 ~ 4) .......................................................................................
Program 47—Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes Assigned by
Area Codes (Table 1 ~ 8) .......................................................................
Program 48—Station Toll Restriction Classification ...............................
LEAST COST ROUTING ............................................................................
LEAST COST ROUTING OVERVIEW ........................................................
Definition .................................................................................................
Conditions ...............................................................................................
COMPLETING THE LEAST COST ROUTING SYSTEM RECORD...........
LCR CO Line Programming Reference Table ........................................
Program 50 Series—LCR Definitions .....................................................
Route Plan Overview ..............................................................................
Program 55 Series—LCR Modified Digits Tables ..................................
SYSTEM RECORD SHEETS .....................................................................
Strata DK Software Releases .................................................................
Release 2 Software Guide ......................................................................
Release 3 Software Guide ......................................................................
Release 4 Software Guide ......................................................................
Program Number Index ..........................................................................
Toll Restriction System Record Sheet ....................................................
Least Cost Routing System Record Sheet .............................................
-ii-
PAGE
i
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-27
2-27
2-27
2-28
2-28
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-31
2-31
2-31
2-33
2-35
2-37
2-39
2-40
2-42
2-45
2-47
2-127
2-141
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE LIST
TABLE
2-A
2-B
2-C
SUBJECT
PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 IN NUMERICAL ORDER WITH
SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED ..........................................................
ACCOUNT CODE PROGRAM OPTION MATRIX ......................................
OVERRIDE OPTION MATRIX ....................................................................
PAGE
2-48
2-157
2-158
FIGURE LIST
FIGURE
2-1
2-2
SUBJECT
LCR OPERATIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM ...................................................
PROGRAMMING KEY SEQUENCE OVERVIEW ......................................
-iii-
PAGE
2-30
2-51
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
previously entered or random data (of the type
listed) is cleared by this program. This program
must be run when first installing a system or a
PCTU (or PCTUS).
1 GENERAL
1.00 This chapter consists of System Record
Sheets and instructions on how to fill out each of
them. The chapter begins with the instructions:
first the basic program instructions, followed by
Toll Restriction instructions, then the Least Cost
Routing instructions. The remainder of the chapter
contains the System Record Sheets, organized in
the same sequence as the instructions.
Program 03—Flexible PCB Slot Assignments:
The software must be informed as to what
type of PCB and PCB option(s) are installed in
each slot of the KSU. Use the PCB Code
Reference Table on the Program 03 record
sheet to determine the proper PCB Code.
Always enter PCTU or PCTUS in Slot 00. Enter
options from the choice of CRCU-4, CRCU-8,
EOCU, DDSS console, or HDSS console. Also
enter DDCB or HDCB where installed—this
will become useful elsewhere. Record station
ports assigned to the PDKU, PEKU, PSTU,
PESU, and PEMU interfaces. Enter CO/TIE
line numbers for the PCOU and PEMU PCBs.
Always enter the code for the PIOU or PIOUS
or PEPU in the last slot. This record sheet is the
main record for the hardware configuration of
the entire system. An example of the proper
recording of Program 03 can be found at the
end of Section 400-096-204.
1.10 System Record Sheet Data Entry
1.11 The System Record Sheets are used to
record the assignment of features or the operation
of each program. Each sheet provides space to
record data. This data will be referred to when
programming the system. The following consists
of descriptions of each of the programs available
with the STRATA DK systems.
1.12 Initialized data information can be found in
the Notes at the bottom of each System Record
Sheet.
1.20 Basic System Record Instructions
IMPORTANT NOTE!
After complete entry of Program 03, turn
the KSU power supply switch off and wait
five seconds before turning back on. This
will set in memory all of the configuration
data entered in Program 03.
Program 90—Initializing Programs: All customer
data can be cleared and set to the initialized
state for any program or range of programs. If
the system is being installed for the first time,
this program must be run to erase random
data from RAM which may have been caused
by the PCTU's (or PCTUS's) jumper movement to the internal battery. Initialized data
information can be found at the bottom of each
System Record Sheet. If the system is being
installed in a new location, all programs (00 ~
97) should be initialized.
Program 00—Software Check/Remote Maintenance Security Code Assignments:
• Level 1 Security Code—Remote Maintenance security code which allows entry to
all programs and data.
• Level 2 Security Code—Remote Maintenance security code which allows entry to
Programs 30 ~ 39 and 77 ~ 89.
NOTE:
After complete entry of Program 90, turn the
KSU power supply switch off and wait five
seconds before turning back on.
Program 04—Port/Station Number Assignment:
Initialized station numbers are 200 ~ 295. Door
phone standard numbering is 151 ~ 159 and
161 ~ 163; the internal modem (IMDU) is 19,
and port 99 is the DISA class of service port.
This numbering cannot be changed with Program 04. Only the first digit can be changed by
Program 92—Initializing Speed Dial Numbers,
VM ID Codes, Character Message Memory,
Timed Reminders, Digital Telephone Volume Levels, and Call Forward Memory: All
2-1
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
using Program 05. The system automatically
assigns door phone station numbers if a door
phone is specified in Program 77-1. Station
number assignment is fully flexible so that
each station can have any number assigned
up to four digits. However, if the first digit is
not 2, access code conflicts may exist (see
Program 05), and a new system numbering
plan will have to be carefully worked out. All
STRATA DK telephone and data interface unit
user guides are written using the standard
access codes and station numbers. If desired,
a telephone accompanying a DSS console can
have a station number of 0 or 01, etc. without
conflict. If no assignment is made in Program
04, the system, upon powering up, will automatically assign eight station numbers for each
PDKU, PEKU, PESU and PSTU installed and
four for each PEMU. This is done in sequence
of ascending slot numbers for station numbers
200 and up. If station numbers are assigned in
Program 04 then they are fixed to a slot
number—any movement of PDKU, PEKU,
PESU or PSTU station cards must be accompanied by reassignment in Program 04 or else
the telephones will have their station numbers
changed.
•
•
•
•
Program 05—Flexible Access Code Numbering:
The first digit of a feature access code may be
changed to a different digit or to two digits.
Digits after this prefix cannot be changed.
Standard access codes are provided with the
Program 05 System Record Sheet. Some
access codes cannot be changed (such as the
code for Automatic Callback) and are shown
with N/A on the record sheet. Access code
conflicts may exist if new access codes are
assigned, and a new system numbering plan
will have to be carefully worked out. Pay
particular attention to the internal modem
(station number19) and door phones (151 ~
159, 161 ~ 163). Station number assignments
may have to be changed using Program 04.
•
•
•
Program 10-1—System Assignments 1: The
following options are available on a systemwide basis.
• Two CO Conference, LED 20—Two CO
lines can be conferenced with one or two
2-2
telephones (digital, electronic, or standard).
Conference (see LED 19) in this program
must be enabled for this feature to work.
Also, two CO line conference must be
allowed for Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) use of outgoing lines.
Conference, LED 19—The ability of stations to perform any conference can be
allowed or disallowed system-wide with
LED 19.
Ring Detect Time, LED 18 (Release 2
and Higher)—This should be set to "normal" unless connected to Central Office/
CENTREX lines that send ring signals less
than 120 milliseconds. (Release 1 is shortring only.)
Intercom Volume PAD, LED 17—ON reduces station-to-station intercom volume.
LED 17 should be OFF in all cases except
where extreme quiet room noise is expected.
ABR Cycles, LED 12—If activated from
an electronic or digital telephone, Automatic Busy Redial will retry dialing a telephone number on a CO line if a far end
busy signal is detected. Turn LED 12 ON to
have the system try up to 10 times: turn
OFF for up to 15 attempts. This feature is
not available with standard telephones.
ABR Redial Time, LED 11—Upon detection of a far end busy signal on a CO line,
Automatic Busy Redial will retry either once
every 30 seconds or once every minute.
Turn LED 11 ON for 30 seconds; turn OFF
for one minute.
System Speed Dial Override, Toll Restriction, LED 10—System Speed Dial (6
0 ~ 9 9) can be chosen to override Toll
Restriction if LED 10 is turned ON.
Exclusive Hold, LED 09—Exclusive Hold
allows electronic and digital telephones to
place calls on hold (by pressing the Hold
(HOLD) button twice) so that other stations cannot pick up the held call with a CO
line button. This feature can be disabled on
a system-wide basis. Any station can pick
up an exclusive hold call by using the call
pickup code.
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• Alternate Point Answer/Transfer Pri-
• Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Sig-
vacy, LED 08—If Transfer Privacy is selected, a transferred call can only be answered at the called station upon transfer
of that call. With Alternate Point Answer,
any electronic or digital telephone with the
appropriate CO line button can pick up a
call transferred to another telephone. In
either case, call pickup will function from
any station.
Ring Transfer, LED 07—This option defines station operation for transferring CO
line calls. If Ring Transfer is allowed, the
system will allow “blind” transfers to busy
or idle stations—the transferring station
may release a transferred call before the
called party answers. If not allowed, the
system will allow supervised transfers
only—the called station must answer before the transferring station releases. If
Ring Transfer is not allowed, immediate
recall occurs if “blind” transfer is attempted.
The system denies Ring Transfer to stations in the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode,
and immediate recall will occur if it is attempted.
CO Repeat Ringing, LED 06—If selected,
the incoming ringing timing pattern at a
station will be the same as the CO line
ringing pattern. This is used mainly with
CENTREX or PBX systems which may
vary the ring pattern to distinguish between
intercom and incoming calls, etc. If Standard Ringing is chosen, CO line station
ringing will be a one second on, three
seconds off cycle regardless of the incoming ring pattern. Some Central Offices have
ringing characteristics such that this option
would not be desirable.
Incoming Call Abandon Timing, LED
05—The amount of time between incoming CO line ring signals determines when
the system will discontinue (abandon) sending ringing tones to stations. The choice of
six or eight seconds is dependent on the
CO ring pattern. This assignment has no
effect if the CO Repeat Ringing option is
used.
nal Time, LED 04—DTMF signals sent out
to CO lines can be either 80 or 160 milliseconds in length. DTMF to PSTU/PESU ports
(including voice mail ports) are not affected
by this assignment. See Program 10-2 for
PSTU/PESU DTMF timing. This program
pertains to manual dialing or speed dialing
from all Toshiba telephones, including the
2000-series Digital Telephones.
• Dial Pulse (DP) Make Ratio, LED 03—
Dial Pulse timing sent out to CO lines can
be changed from the normal 40% make
ratio to 33%. This selection only applies to
those CO lines assigned in Program 15 to
signal dialing with dial pulse instead of
Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF).
• CO Line Reseize Guard Time, LED 02
(Release 2 and Higher)—Should be set
for 0.45 seconds for most installations. Set
guard time for 1.5 seconds (using Program 10-1, LED 02 ON, and Program 420), if CO lines experience the following
situations: no dial tone when a line is released and reseized immediately; or, when
operating behind CENTREX or PBX, false
hookflash signals are sent to the Central
Office when stations release and reseize
the same CO line immediately.
• Tone First/Voice First Signaling-Electronic and Digital Telephone, LED 01—
With Voice First, an intercom call to an
electronic or digital telephone will be preceded by a one second burst of tone,
followed by voice communication via the
Handsfree Answerback function. For Tone
First, repetitive intercom ring tone is sent in
a one-second on, three-seconds off pattern. Conversion from one signaling mode
to the other can be made by dialing an
additional digit of 1 from the calling station.
•
•
•
Program 10-2—System Assignments 2: The
following options are available on a systemwide basis.
• Stations Use External Amplified Conference, LED 19—Use this feature only
(LED 19 ON) if an external amplifier (Program 10-3) is used for two-CO line conference calls. This will provide additional
2-3
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
•
•
•
•
•
amplification to the station during a twoCO line conference call. If an external
amplifier is not switched into two-CO line
conference calls in all cases, LED 19 must
be OFF if there is line unbalance which
may cause "HUM" noise on the station talk
path during two CO-line conference calls.
It is recommended to test two-CO line
conference with LED 19 ON; if there is no
HUM noise, keep LED 19 ON.
Two-CO Line Conference, LED 18—LED
18 should be ON whenever two-CO line
(Tandem, DISA, TIE) connection is allowed
in Program 15-5 and Program 10-1, LEDs
19 and 20. This will increase the volume
level between the two outside parties on a
Tandem (two-CO line) connection; but, it
will not affect station volume if conferenced
into the tandem connection. This option is
not associated with external amplified conference (Program 10-3).
"TRNS" Soft Key Immediate Transfer,
LED 17 (Release 4)—If this feature is
activated and a transfer is initiated with the
"TRNS" Soft Key, the call will ring transfer
(Camp-on Busy) immediately after the last
digit of the called station (busy or idle)
number is dialed. This feature does not
apply to transfers initiated with the fixed
Cnf/Trn (CONF/TRNS) button or
"CONF" Soft Key.
Executive Override Warning Tone, LED
16—Executive Override allows a station
user (if assigned in Program 30) to break
into and overhear an existing station conversation. A warning tone can be set optionally to be heard by the conversing parties.
External Page Included with All Call
Page, LED 15—If the All Call voice page
access code (39) is dialed, external page
(all zones) may be included with this option. This option does not affect the
AllÍCallÍPage button function, which activates electronic and digital telephone
speakers only, never external page.
Privacy Override Warning Tone, LED
14—Privacy Override allows a station user
to enter into, and overhear, an existing CO
•
•
•
•
•
•
2-4
line conversation by pressing a CO line
button (if the called station is assigned in
Program 30). A warning tone can be set
optionally to be heard by the conversing
parties.
Auto Callback Camp-on Tone, LED 13—
A busy called digital or electronic telephone user may optionally hear a one-time
beep tone (from the speaker) signifying
that another station has tried to call and
has activated the Automatic Callback feature.
CO Line Beep Tone, LED 12—If this LED
is lit, a beep tone will be sent every three
minutes to stations on outgoing CO line
calls.
Dual-tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Tone
Return, LED 11 (Release 2 and Higher)—
This option deletes DTMF tones that are
returned to digital or electronic telephones
when manually dialing or speed dialing. It
also eliminates auto dial digits returned to
callers when digits are automatically sent
to voice mail ports on forwarded calls.
Background Music/Music-on-Hold
Separation, LEDs 10 and 9 (Release 2
and Higher)—A separate Background Music (BGM) source can be sent to digital
telephone speakers, electronic telephone
speakers, and external page speakers,
while another Music-on-hold (MOH) source
can be sent to outside lines or internal
stations on hold. With Release 2, the BGM
source can be connected to either Circuit 3
on a PEKU PCB or Circuit 8 on a PESU
PCB, and the PCB must be installed in Slot
01. With Release 3, the PCB can be installed in any slot (see Program 19). Release 4 enables PSTU Circuits 3 or 8 to
connect with the BGM source. No matter
what release, the MOH source connects to
the P6 terminal on the PCTU or PCTUS
PCB.
Display Dialed Number Timing, LED 08—
An LCD telephone will display a dialed
number for either 15 or 60 seconds before
the display changes back to the normal
time and date format.
Standard Telephone Distinctive Ring,
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
LED 07 (Release 2 and Higher)—The
outside-call ring pattern to standard telephones, can be made distinct from the
intercom ring pattern. If Distinctive Ring is
enabled, the CO-line call ring pattern will
be 0.2-seconds on, 0.4-seconds off, 0.2seconds on, 3.4-seconds off; if Distinctive
Ring is not enabled, the pattern will be per
Program 10-1, LED 06. Intercom calls,
with or without Distinctive Ring enabled,
ring with a one-second on and 3-seconds
off pattern.
• Voice Mail Identification Code, Dualtone Multi-frequency (DTMF) Signal
Time, LED 06 (Release 2 and Higher)—
DTMF digits automatically sent to PSTU/
PESU voice mail ports can be sent in either
80- or 160-millisecond bursts. This applies
to digits sent via the voice mail identification code (656/657) set at each station.
This also applies to manually dialed digits
sent to voice mail ports from Toshiba telephones, including 2000-series Digital Telephones. The signal time is fixed at 160
milliseconds for Release 1.
• TIE/DISA Busy Tone Cadence, LED 05
(Release 3 and Higher)—Select the busy
tone cadence for DISA/TIE lines with this
LED. Light the LED for a 0.5 second cadence (Bell Precise busy tone cadence);
Leave it OFF for the STRATA 0.25 second
busy tone cadence. The Bell Precise busy
tone cadence should be selected so callers will know that they have reached a busy
station when calling in on a TIE or DISA
line. If it is not selected, the busy tone may
be confused with the reorder tone cadence.
• Voice Mail Message Waiting Cancel Via
Dial 6 4
4/Automatic, LED 04 (Release 2
and Higher)—"Dial 6 4" should be enabled if the DK system is connected to a
voice mail (VM) system that sets station
Message Waiting (MW) LEDs by dialing 6
3 + station number. This insures the message LED remains flashing until all VM
messages have been retreived, at which
time the VM machine should cancel the
Message LED by dialing 6 4 + station
number. With "Dial 6 4" enabled, mes-
sage indications set on a station from VM
ports will not automatically be cancelled by
the DK system when the station calls Voice
Mail to retrieve messages. If "Automatic" is
selected, the flashing message waiting LED
is canceled any time a station calls the VM
machine and the VM machine answers.
NOTE:
Message Waiting cancel via "Dial 6 4 +
station number" only applies to VM ports that
have LEDs 16 and 17 set ON in Program 31.
• Ringing Modes, LED 03—The STRATA
DK system can be set for either two-ringing-mode or three-ringing-mode operation.
The DAY and NIGHT modes are available
with two-mode operation, and the DAY,
DAY2, and NIGHT modes are available
with three-mode operation. Each ringing
mode has distinct CO line ring assignments (Programs 78, and 81 ~ 89).The
three-mode selection is useful for alternate
answering positions. Station users can
change modes with the Night Transfer
button on either a DSS console (Program
29) or a telephone (Program 39).
• Call Forward Override From DSS Console, LED 02—If a station has activated
Call Forwarding, all calls to that station—
except for calls from the DSS console
position—will forward to another number.
A choice exists of whether to call forward
from the console itself or from the digital or
electronic telephone assigned to it. If the
console calls (using the DSS console station buttons) are forwarded, the attendant
telephone will not be forwarded, and vice
versa. This allows the console operator
flexibility in reaching a station user.
NOTE:
This feature applies to both types of DSS
consoles, the DDSS and the HDSS.
• Tone First/Voice First-DSS Console,
LED 01—The intercom call signal from a
DSS console can be set for Tone First
Signaling or Voice First Signaling. This
2-5
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
setting is independent of the system-wide
signal option in Program 10-1. Thus, DSS
consoles and their attendant stations can
ring with different signaling modes.
and 20; Program 10-2, LEDs 18 and 19; and
Program 15-5 for more information regarding
two-CO line conference.)
IMPORTANT NOTE!
The DK system allows up to eight simultaneous two-CO line conference connections. The amplifiers are switched in automatically starting with the first two-CO
line call. Calls made when there are no
amplifiers available will not be amplified.
Program 10-3—System Assignments 3: The
following options are available on a systemwide basis.
• Speed Dial Entry Timeout, LED 19 (Release 4)—Station users can either have up
to one minute or up to three minutes to
store a Speed Dial number or memo. If
they fail to store the number or memo
within the set time, their station will exit the
Speed Dial-storage mode and return to the
normal idle state. The three-minute setting
is recommended if station users will frequently be storing memos with Speed Dial
numbers using the MODE key below the
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). The timer is
required because of the Release 4 User
Programmable Feature Buttons feature,
which allows the Intercom (INT), Hold
(HOLD), and Cnf/Trns (CONF/TRNS)
button functions to be programmed in
Speed Dial Memory. There is no time limit
for programming Speed Dial with Releases
1, 2, and 3.
NOTE:
The external amplifiers will also amplify twoCO line DISA and TIE line calls.
Program 12—System Assignments-Basic Timing:
• Pause Timing, Code 3—Short and long
pauses may be programmed in speed dial
numbers by station users. The short pause
length can be set system wide for either 1.5
or 3 seconds with this program. The long
pause length is always 10 seconds.
NOTE:
This program applies to Speed Dial numbers
used for both voice and data calls. Data call
pause length is determined by the program.
Amplified Conference Assignments (LED 01 ~
04, Release 3 and Higher): Light LEDs 01 ~
04 to identify which PEKU ports should be
connected to external amplifiers. External
Amplified Conference is provided by customersupplied two-way amplifiers connected to system PEKU ports to provide amplification of
“two-CO” line calls. Up to four amplifiers can be
connected (2 PEKU ports for each amplifier) to
amplify up to four two-CO line calls simultaneously. The amplifier is switched into the call
automatically when a two-CO line call is established, amplifiers are switched into calls starting from the lowest PEKU ports to the highest
(see Program 10-3 System Record Sheet).
Skipping PEKU ports is allowed. Example: The
first amplifier can be connected to PEKU ports
17 and 18, skipping ports 09 and 10. In this
case, LED 02 should be ON and LED 01
should be OFF. (See Program 10-1, LEDs 19
• Flash Timing, Code 4—When on a CO
line, a station user can press the Flash
(FLASH) button and the CO line will open
(flash) for a period of either 2 seconds, 0.2
seconds, or 0.5 seconds depending on this
assignment.(A flash can also be activated
by dial code Cnf/Trn 4 5 or CONF/
TRNS 4 5.) In general, this choice reflects
whether to disconnect and regain dial tone
(2 seconds), or to use PBX or CENTREX
features which require a flash signal (0.5
seconds). This flash timing also applies to
flashes inserted when dialing via data interface units (DIUs).
NOTE:
The 0.2 seconds option is not normally used
in the United States.
• Pause After Flash, Code 5—Some Cen-
2-6
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
tral Offices or CENTREX facilities require a
period of time after a flash signal before
they can accept dialing signals. A selection
of pause timing is available to automatically delay any dialing signals after flash.
This timing applies to Speed Dial calls (with
flash signals between the telephone number digits) as well as manual dialing.
• CRCU Seize Time, Code 9—One channel
of the CRCU Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) receiver/decoder is seized when it
is needed for the decoding process, such
as with a standard telephone with a DTMF
dialpad. When placing outgoing calls with
DTMF standard telephones, the talk path
to the outside party is not “cut-through”
until the CRCU circuit is released. The
release time of the CRCU channel can be
programmed for a time between one and
nine seconds (initialized timing is four seconds)—this is the time it takes to release
the CRCU circuit after the last digit is
dialed. The choice of timing is a trade-off
between CO line time to connect and user
speed. If the time is too long, the outside
called party may answer before the voice
path is “cut-through,” and the caller will not
be heard. If the time is too short, a standard
telephone user inputting DTMF tones could
be cut off prematurely from using other
features, such as speed dial. Standard
telephones will also be able to defeat Toll
Restriction if the seize time is too short and
they are not required to dial outgoing calls
via Least Cost Routing (LCR)—it is recommended that standard telephones always
be required to dial outgoing calls via LCR to
prevent them from defeating Toll Restriction.
telephone (digital or electronic) accompanying
a DSS console (DDSS or HDSS) will be the
Message Center. However, if incoming traffic
to a DDSS or HDSS console attendant is
heavy, another station may be assigned to be
the Message Center.
Program 15—Assigning DP/DTMF, Tenant Service to Individual CO Lines:
• Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail
Calls, Code 0 (Release 3 and Higher)—
Some Central Offices will send the AR
signal—a 95 or 450-millisecond open of
the CO line loop—after (typically 1 ~ 15
seconds) an external party hangs up to
disconnect the CO line. If the Central Office
sends this signal after an external party
hangs up and before the VM/auto attendant
transfers a call, D tone will be sent to the
voice mail port (Program 30, LED 15),
releasing and clearing that port for another
call. With Release 3, D tone will not be sent
to release the call if the outside caller
hangs up after the VM/auto attendant hook
flashes (to transfer the call). With Release
4, D tone will be sent after the hookflash.
This feature is active on all voice calls. The
LCD of a station which is disconnected
from a CO line call by the AR signal will
display, "CO LINE HANG UP" with Release
4 systems. "BUSY" will display with Release
3 systems. With Releases 3 and 4, the CO
line, can be disconnected anytime by the
AR signal during the "talk state" of a call.
With Release 4, CO line calls disconnected
by the AR signal will be represented on the
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
report by a "*" next to the CO line number.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
This option can not always be utilized
because some Central Offices may send
unreliable AR signaling or no AR signaling. AR signaling is sometimes referred to
as Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision.
NOTE:
If no digits are dialed after accessing an
outside line, the CRCU remains seized for 15
seconds and then drops; however, the CO
line remains connected.
Program 13—Defining the Message Center:
Each digital and electronic telephone can receive a maximum of four message waiting
indications. One of these four is reserved for
the designated Message Center. Typically, a
• CO Outgoing Signal, Code 1—Each CO
line can be independently assigned to have
either Dial Pulse (DP) or Dual-tone Multi-
2-7
PRAMMING
PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
PROGRAMMING
PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SECTION
400-096-302
SEPTEMBER
1992
SEPTEMBER 1992
A system may be effectively split into two
parts in order to serve two tenants using
the same system in a shared arrangement.
This assignment dedicates CO lines to one
tenant or the other. If tenant service is not
desired, leave the assignments all for Tenant 1, as initialized.
frequency (DTMF) signaling.
• CO Dial Pulse (DP) Rate, Code 2—If a
CO line is assigned DP signaling, the rate
can be either 20 or 10 pulses per second.
Some Central Offices do not reliably accept 20 pulses per second.
• Automatic Release (AR) From Hold/
Transfer, Code 3—Some Central Offices
will send the AR signal—a 95 or 450millisecond open of the CO line loop—after
(typically 1 ~ 15 seconds) an external party
hangs up. If the system CO line is on hold
(or being transferred to another station or
Auto Attendant port) when this signal occurs, it will be automatically disconnected
if this option is activated. Two-CO line
DISA calls always release when AR is
sent. DISA release via AR is not related to
this program (Release 2 and higher). CO
line calls disconnected by the AR signal will
be represented on the Station Message
Detail Recording (SMDR) report by a "*"
next to the CO line number.
NOTE:
The NightÍTransfer1 (NT1) and the Night
Transfer2 (NT2) buttons control CO ring
modes for Tenant 1 and Tenant 2, respectively.
• Forced Account Code (Verified or Non-
verified), Code 7—If the Forced Account
Code feature is used (see Program 30) a
station user is required to enter an account
code before a CO line call can be completed. A choice exists for each CO line.
• Operation After CO Line Flash, Code
8—If a standard telephone user is on an
existing CO line call and flashes the
hookswitch, a Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) receiver channel may or may not
be connected, depending on this assignment. If the CO is a rotary dial only type, the
CRCU must be seized after flash when
dialing from DTMF standard telephones.
The CRCU will decode the dialed tones
and send dial pulses to the CO line.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
This option can not always be utilized
because some Central Offices may send
unreliable AR signaling or no AR signaling. AR signaling is sometimes referred to
as Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision.
Program 16—Assigning CO Line Groups: CO
lines may be accessed with a dialing code
instead of with a CO line button. Up to eight
groups may be accessed by dialing 81 ~ 88;
this is useful for WATS lines or other facilities,
and is heavily used in Least Cost Routing and
Pooled Line Button assignments. A general
group for outside calling is available with a "dial
9" access code, which is the initialized state for
all CO lines. Program 16 is used to assign
each CO line to one of these groups. Do not
attempt to assign a CO line to more than one
group. A CO line need not be assigned to a
group. If CO lines are not used, they should be
taken out of all groups, including the "dial 9"
group. Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) will not
function if unconnected lines are assigned to a
line group.
• Automatic Release (AR) Time, Code 4—
AR signaling timing is different depending
on the Central Office equipment. An assignment choice exists between Crossbar
or ESS Central Offices.
• Tandem CO Line Connection, Code 5—
Once a two-CO line conference call is
made by an electronic or digital telephone
user, the user may drop out of the conference and leave the two CO lines connected. The choice exists for each CO line
that may have this capability. This option
must be enabled to allow CO lines to be
used for outgoing DISA calls (for Release
2 and higher).
• CO Line Tenant Assignment, Code 6—
2-8
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
Program 17—TIE Line Page/Handsfree Answerback: The External Page and Handsfree Answerback features can be optionally activated
for each TIE line. For reference purposes, on
the System Record Sheet, enter the slot number where each PEMU is installed—this program does not assign TIE lines to slot numbers; the CO/TIE line number (01 ~ 36) is
needed for input to this program, but is actually
determined by the PEMU’s slot position in the
KSU. Program 03 contains the CO/TIE line
number needed for input.
•
Program 19—Alternate Background Music
(BGM) Source Slot Assignment (Release 3
and Higher): The printed circuit board (PCB)
connected to the alternate BGM source can be
in any slot with Release 3 and higher. Use this
program to designate that slot. The PCB,
though, must reside in Slot 01 with Release 2.
(An alternate BGM is not supported with Release 1.) See Program 10-2 to tell the system
which type of PCB (PEKU, PESU, PSTU) will
support the source. The alternate BGM source
sends BGM to the external speakers and telephone (digital and eletronic) speakers. If an
alternate BGM source is utilized, the Music-onHold (MOH) source connected to the PCTU or
PCTUS will continue to play for CO lines and
stations that are on hold.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If alternate BGM source is not connected
to a PEKU, PESU or PSTU, assign slot 01
as data in Program 19-1. This will ensure
that all PSTU ports function normally. EKTs
and DKTs installed in Slot 01 will not be
affected by this assignment.
•
•
•
Program 20—Data Interface Unit (DIU: PDIU-DI
and PDIU-DS) Configuration (Release 3 and
higher): This program identifies the PDKU station
ports connected to DIUs and the type of DIU connected.
NOTE:
DIUs can be connected to ports associated
with PDKU1A Circuits 1 ~ 7 only. All PDKU2A
circuits, 1 ~ 8, can support DIUs.
Stand-alone Data Interface Unit (PDIUDS) connected to the PDKU port. Each
PDIU-DI uses the same PDKU port as the
station it is attached to. Each PDIU-DS
requires a separate PDKU port.
LED 02—If the DIU must respond to AT
commands and return result codes, this
LED should be lit. DIU “AT” dialing commands and “result” codes are listed in the
Data Interface User Guide in the Operating
Procedures section of this manual. If LED
02 is not lit, the DIU will only respond to AT
dialing commands (ATDT, ATD, and ATDD)
and will not return result codes. If the DIU
is connected to a terminal or a personal
computer with communication software,
LED 02 should be ON. If the DIU is connected to a modem, LED 02 should be ON.
If the DIU is connected to a printer, LED 02
should be OFF.
LED 03—If a PDIU-DS is connected to the
PDKU port, identify whether the PDIU-DS
is connected to a modem (LED ON) or not
connected to a modem (LED OFF). If not
connected to a modem (LED OFF), the
connected device can be a DCE or DTE.
This option is not necessary for PDIU-DIs,
because they are not normally connected
to modems.
LED 04—Light this LED if a PDIU-DS is
connected to the PDKU port; leave OFF, if
a PDIU-DI is connected. If a PDIU-DI is
connected, the digital telephone supporting it may require the DataÍCall (DATA),
DataÍRelease (DRLS), and/or Modem
(MODEM) buttons assigned in Program 39.
LED 05—If the system CO lines are connected to a PBX, CENTREX, or a Central
Office that is slow to return dial tone after
seizure, light this LED to insert a pause
before and after the PBX or CENTREX
access code is dialed by the DIU also; light
LED 05 to automatically insert a pause
before network telephone numbers are
autodialed by DIUs.
NOTE:
The pause length is set in Program 12-3, and
CO lines behind PBX/CENTREX are assigned
in Programs 42-0 and 42-1 ~ 8.
• LED 01—Light this LED if there is an Inte-
• LED 06 (Release 4)—If a PDIU-DS is
grated Data Interface Unit (PDIU-DI) or a
connected to a modem, turn LED 06 ON to
2-9
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
NOTES:
1. When modems are connected to PSTU or
PESU ports, the Executive/Privacy Override blocking feature (Program 31, LED
18) should be enabled for the modem
PSTU or PESU ports for data security.
The LED 18 feature should be disabled to
enable callers to switch from voice to data,
or vice versa.
2. Digital telephones with PDIU-DIs that must
access modems from a pool require a
Modem (MODEM) button assigned in
Program 39.
3. PDKU/PDIU-DS ports that are connected to
modems in the modem pool should be set with
LEDs 01, 02, 03, 04, and 06 ON in Program
20.
4. If a modem connected to PDIU-DS is
connected to a telephone network CO
line, instead of a PSTU or PESU station
port, Program 21 should not be used.
5. Use Program 22 to assign modem/PDIUDS stations to hunt sequences
6. DIUs can be connected to ports associated with PDKU1A Circuits 1 ~ 7 only. All
PDKU2A circuits, 1 ~ 8, can support DIUs.
cause the modem to disconnect the line
when the user presses the DataÍRelease
(DRLS) button. The PDIU-DS will pulse
DTR on outgoing modem calls only, not on
incoming modem calls. Initially, the modem should be sent AT command "AT &
D2" so it can recognize DTR pulse sent to
it from the PDIU-DS. The LED 06 option is
available only with Release 4.
NOTE:
It is recommended to change the escape
sequence (typically + + +) of a modem connected to a PDIU-DS. Separate sequences
will enable users to escape more efficiently.
Escape sequences are changed with the
ATS2 = __ command.
• LEDs 17 ~ 20—Data security groups can
be set to block data calls between DIUs.
DIUs can only make data calls to DIUs in
the same security group. LEDs 17 ~ 20
assign the DIU to the appropriate security
group: light LED 17 for Group 1; LED 18, for
Group 3; LED 19, for Group 2; and LED 20,
for Group 4.
Program 22—Data Interface Unit (DIU) Station
Hunting (Release 3 and Higher): If a DIU
station (printer, modem, etc.) is busy, data
station hunting allows the data call to that
station to hunt to an alternate DIU station
assigned in this program. if the hunted DIU
station is busy, the system will ring the next
“hunt-to” station, and so on. If all DIU stations
in the “hunt-to” sequence are busy, then the
data caller will receive a busy tone. It is recommended that all PDIU-DS/PDKU station ports
grouped in a modem pooling or printer pooling/
server configuration be placed into a huntsequence arrangement with Program 22. Program 22 applies to PDIU-DS and PDIU-DI
data stations, not telephone stations.
Typical LED settings for Program 20.
• PDIU-DI Connected to a Terminal or
Personal Computer—LEDs 01, 02, 05,
and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• PDIU-DS Connected to a Printer—LEDs
01, 04, and 17 ON; all other LEDs OFF.
• PDIU-DS Connected to a Modem—LEDs
01, 02, 03, 04, 06, and 17 ON; all other
LEDs OFF.
Program 21—Modem Pool Port Assignments
(Release 3 and Higher): With this program,
identify modems connected to PSTU or PESU
standard telephone ports (line side of modem)
and PDKU/PDIU-DS ports (RS-232 side of
modem). Each selection pair assigns the modem to the system modem pool. With data
security groups (Program 20, LEDs 17 ~ 20)
and the call the blocking feature (Program 31,
LED 04), modem access can be denied or
allowed to data users.
NOTE:
When a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem(s)
assigned to the system modem pool in Program 21, modem hunting is automatic when
the user presses the DATA button to transfer
a CO line call to a modem; however, if the
2-10
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
user dials the modem's PDIU-DS's station
number, modem hunting will follow the hunt
sequence specified in Program 22.
the 60 buttons to be DirectÍStationÍSelection
(DSS) 200 ~ 257, AllÍCallÍPage (AC), and
NightÍTransfer (NT). Each of the four possible
consoles can be independently programmed.
Program 28—DSS Console (DDSS and HDSS)/
Attendant Telephone Assignments: Up to
four DDSS consoles, or four HDSS consoles,
or any combination of the two types of consoles up to four may be installed. A DDSS
console can only be connected to Circuit 8 of a
PDKU, and an HDSS console can only be
connected to Circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU. The
telephone connected to Circuit 1 of the PCB
supporting a console is designated as an Attendant telephone. Consoles and telephones
are numbered 1 ~ 4 as they are installed from
the lowest to highest slot number. For example, if a PDKU in Slot 01 had a DDSS
console connected to it, the DDSS console
would be designated Console #1 and the digital telephone connected to Circuit 1 would be
Attendant Telephone #1. As many as four consoles can be assigned to one attendant telephone.
Because more than one console can be assigned
to an attendant telephone, the detailed arrangement must be programmed. Initialized data assigns one console to one attendant telephone,
both connected to the same PDKU or PEKU PCB.
Up to four DSS consoles can be assigned to an
attendant telephone.
Program 30—Station Class of Service:
• Privacy Override, LED 19—Privacy Override allows a station to enter into and overhear an existing CO line conversation by
pressing a common CO line button. A
maximum of two stations may override an
existing “station-CO line” conversation. A
warning tone may be set optionally (see
Program 10-2). The choice with LED 19 is
for which station is allowed to override calls
with Privacy Override. Privacy Override of
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) twoCO line calls is not allowed.
NOTES:
1. To configure the DK system to operate as
nonprivate, allow Privacy Override from
all stations.
2. Privacy Override can be blocked by a
station via a Privacy button (Program 39)
or by the Executive/Privacy Override blocking option (Program 31, LED 18).
3. See Table 2-C at the end of this chapter.
• Executive Override, LED 18—Executive
Override allows a station to break into and
overhear an existing station conversation
by dialing the digit 3 after the busy station
number. A warning tone may be set optionally (see Program 10-2). The LED 18
option is for which calling station can use
Executive Override.
NOTES:
1. DDSS consoles and digital telephones
are only available with Release 3 and
higher.
2. DSS console #4 is not available with the
PCTUS PCB.
Program 29—DSS (DDSS and HDSS) Console
Button Assignments: Each button on the DSS
consoles may be flexibly assigned as either a
DirectÍStationÍSelection (DSS), Line
(CO), or SD button. The standard equipped
NightÍTransfer (NT), and AllÍCallÍPage
(AC) buttons may be changed to one of these
three types, but not vice versa. Station Speed
Dial buttons assigned to a DSS console share the
associated attendant digital or electronic
telephone’s Speed Dial memory. The personal
Speed Dial numbers of the DSS console circuit
port(s) are not available. Initialized data assigns
NOTE:
Executive Override can be blocked by stations that have Executive/Privacy Override
blocking enabled in Program 31, LED 18;
the PrivacyÍonÍLine (PRIVACY) button
does not block Executive Override. See Table
2-C at the end of this chapter.
• DND Override, LED 17—An electronic or
digital telephone can have a button programmed for Do Not Disturb (DND). When
called, a station with DND activated will
return very fast busy tone (four tones per
2-11
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
second). If the caller dials "2" after dialing
the station number, a DND Override tone
will be heard on the called station’s speaker.
The LED 17 assignment is for which calling
station can use DND Override.
• Toll Restriction Traveling Class Code
Change, LED 16 (Release 3 and
Higher)—If this LED is lit for a port, the
station occupying it can change the fourdigit Toll Restriction Traveling Class of
Service Codes established in Program
44B. Stations selected for this feature must
follow the dialing sequences below to
change the codes:
DISA line user) will be verified per Account
Codes set in Program 69. If the station
user fails to dial one of these specific
Verified Account Codes, the call cannot be
executed (Forced), or the account code
will not be validated for the SMDR call
report (Voluntary).
• Handset/Headset Volume Level, LEDs
12 and 13 (Release 3 and Higher)—This
program sets the initial off-hook volume
level for each digital telephone handset
and/or headset. This level can be changed
with the digital telephone’s volume control
button while the handset or headset is offhook, but it will return to the default level set
in this program after the handset is placed
on-hook. The volume level range for digital
telephone handsets is 1 ~ 9, with 1 as the
lowest volume. Anytime a handset is offhook, its volume level can be adjusted by
the telephone anywhere between 1 ~ 9.
The level setting established in this program, however, can only be from 2 ~ 5.
This level is set with LEDs 12 and 13:
Class 1: Intercom (INT) + 6 2 2 + the
4-digit code + Redial (REDIAL)
Class 2: Intercom (INT) + 6 2 3 + the
4-digit code + Redial (REDIAL)
Class 3: Intercom (INT) + 6 2 4 + the
4-digit code + Redial (REDIAL)
Class 4: Intercom (INT) + 6 2 5 + the
4-digit code + Redial (REDIAL)
NOTE:
The # button may be used instead of the
Redial (REDIAL) button.
For level 5: Both LEDs ON (High)
For level 4: LED 12, OFF; LED 13, ON
For level 3: LED 12, ON; LED 13, OFF
(Initialized setting)
For level 2: Both LEDs OFF (Low)
• Verified Account Code Change, LED 15
(Release 3 and Higher)—If selected for
this feature, a station can change the Verified Account Codes established in Program 69. Selected stations must dial the
the following sequence to change the
codes:
NOTE:
Program 92-5 (LEDs 01 and 05) does not
affect receiver handset/headset volume levels.
• Dial Pulse (Dual-tone Multi-frequency
Intercom (INT) + 6 5 9 + 0 0 0 ~ 2
9 9 + Verified Account Code +
Redial (REDIAL)
(DTMF) Off), LED 11—If any device connected to a PSTU or PESU port does not
require the CRCU for DTMF decoding, it
should be programmed for Dial Pulse. When
the device goes off-hook, the CRCU will
not be accessed, thereby reducing potential traffic to the CRCU.
• Change DISA Security Code, LED 10
(Release 2 and Higher)—This allows a
selected station to change the DISA
security code by dialing Intercom (INT)
+
6 5 8.
NOTE:
The # button may be used instead of the
Redial (REDIAL) button.
• Verified Account Code, LED 14 (Re-
lease 3 and Higher)—If this feature is
selected, all Account Codes (Forced or
Voluntary) dialed by the station user (or
2-12
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• Change TR Override Code, LED 09—
• Speed Dial, LED 05—A station may be
Two Toll Restriction Override codes are
available in the system. When one of these
codes is dialed from any station, all Toll
Restriction is bypassed. These codes can
be changed only by stations assigned in
this program by dialing Intercom (INT) +
6 5 4 for Code 1, or by dialing Intercom
(INT) + 6 5 5 for Code 2.
• Forced Account Code, LED 08—If this
feature is selected, a station or Direct Inward System Access (DISA) line user using a CO line with a Forced Account requirement (Program 15-7) must enter an
Account Code before a CO line call can be
completed. If Forced Account Codes should
be verified, turn on LED 14 in Program 30.
The digit length of Forced Account Codes
is determined in Program 60-4.
• Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Automatic, LED 07—A busy digital or electronic telephone can receive a second voice
communication on intercom via Handsfree
Answerback if the OCA feature is installed.
If a calling station does not have the automatic function, the user must dial an extra
digit of 2 after hearing busy tone in order to
gain access to OCA. Initialized data makes
all stations automatic for OCA.
• Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) Access,
LED 06—The ABR feature can be enabled
or denied for each station. The system will
select the last CO line in the originating line
group each time ABR is initiated (also see
Program 10-1). If the ABR access feature
is not enabled here, the "ABR" Soft Key will
not appear on LCD telephones. (Soft Keys
are available only with Release 4.)
denied the use of Speed Dial (Station and
System) with this program. Initialized data
allows Speed Dial for every port.
• Microphone (M
M i c (M
MIC
C) Button LED)
On at Start of Call, LED 03—The microphone, as well as the Mic (MIC) button
LED, can be selected to be on or off at the
start of a call if the Push On/Push Off mode
(see Mic (MIC) Button Lock) is chosen.
NOTE:
When receiving intercom calls, the flexible
MicrophnÍCut-off (MCO) button (Program 39) can control the microphone to prevent room monitoring and Handsfree Answerback.
• M i c (M
MIC
C) Button Lock, LED 02—An
electronic or digital telephone microphone
can be turned on or off by using the Mic
(MIC) button. Two modes of operation are
available. A momentary operation requires
that the Mic (MIC) button be continuously
pressed to disable the microphone. A Button Lock operation allows an alternate action Push On/Push Off of the Mic (MIC)
button. LED 02 should be ON if microphone lock operation is desired.
• Speakerphone Enabled, LED 01—Any
electronic or digital full speakerphone operation can be disabled by assignment
with this program. If disabled, a speakerphone will act as a handsfree electronic or
digital telephone. Initialized data enables
all speakerphones.
Program 31—Station Class of Service: This
program sets most voice mail (VM) port assignments. Each PESU/PSTU port connected
to a Toshiba VP (or INTOUCH) voice mail
system should have LEDs 04, 05, 09, 15, 16,
17, 18, 19, and 20 turned ON. These LED's
should be set ON for VM ports only, not for
telephone ports.
NOTE:
ABR is restricted via Program 41 in Release
1 software; ABR overrides Program 41 in
Release 2 and higher software. Program 41
is normally used with Least Cost Routing
(LCR); therefore, ABR may not function with
LCR in Release 1, but will always function
with LCR with Release 2 and higher software.
NOTE:
LED 04 may be ON or OFF, depending on VM
device operation. See the LED 04 write up
that follows.
2-13
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
call-by-call basis; this button cannot disable Executive Override blocking.
2. If a modem is assigned to the system
modem pool in Program 21, use this
option to provide data security (LED 18
ON for modem PSTU and PESU ports
assigned in Program 21).
3. If using the system modem pool for data calls
that must be switched between voice and
data, LED 18 in Program 31 should be OFF
for the modem PSTU and PESU ports assigned in Program 21.
• Toshiba VP (B + Station Number), LED
20—This feature is designed for Toshiba
VP (or INTOUCH with B.06 and higher
software) systems connected to a PSTU or
PESU port. DTMF B tone followed by the
station number is sent to Toshiba VP (or
INTOUCH) in situations in which Toshiba
VP (or INTOUCH) would not normally know
the location from which a call was coming,
such as hold recall or "blind" ring transfer
recall. This allows Toshiba VP (or
INTOUCH) to respond more intelligently
with appropriate voice prompts. LED 20
should be lit for PSTU or PESU ports
connected to voice mail devices only, not
for station ports connected to telephones.
The station number is not returned, it blind
transfers to a DND station.
• End/End Signal RCV (VM), LED 17—
Activation of this option allows End-to-End
Signaling of Dual-tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) tones through the system. It is
required on all voice mail-PSTU/PESU
ports for proper signaling communication.
• Receive Voice Mail (VM) ID Code, LED
16—When a station is call forwarded to a
VM system, certain identification (ID) Dualtone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones will
automatically be sent to direct the call to a
specific mailbox (VM ID Code 656). The
automatic ID is also sent to the voice mail
device when electronic or digital telephone
users retrieve messages via the Intercom
and Message Waiting buttons (VM ID Code
657). The VM port must be programmed
for this feature to allow the reception of
DTMF digits.
• Toshiba VP Integration (A Tone/D Tone),
LED 15—This option will cause an answer
tone (DTMF A tone) to be automatically
sent to Toshiba VP (or INTOUCH) when a
station answers, and a disconnect tone
(DTMF D tone) when a station disconnects. This allows Toshiba VP (or
INTOUCH) to respond quickly rather than
waiting a long time in time-out situations. If
the Central Office (CO) provides an Automatic Release (AR) signal, D tone is also
sent to disconnect voice mail (VM) ports
when outside callers hang up (see Program 15-0 and 15-3).
NOTE:
Toshiba VP (B No Station) must be enabled
with LED 19 to allow this function.
• Toshiba VP (B No Station), LED 19—
DTMF “B” tone is sent to Toshiba VP (or
INTOUCH with B.06 and higher software)
to signify a recall where Toshiba VP (or
INTOUCH) already knows the recalling
station number. Again, this allows Toshiba
VP (or INTOUCH) to respond more intelligently with appropriate voice prompts. This
LED should be lit for PSTU or PESU ports
connected to voice mail devices only, not
for station ports connected to telephones.
• Executive and Privacy Override Blocking (Modem), LED 18—This feature denies a station user the capability to break in
with Privacy or Executive Override to a
called station’s connection. It should be set
for PSTU and PESU ports connected to a
modem or voice mail/auto attendant device in order to ensure data and voice
security. This feature may also be used to
deny override of any station.
NOTES:
1. The PrivacyÍRelease (PRVÍRLS) button may be used to disable Privacy on a
NOTE:
AR signaling is sometimes referred to as
2-14
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) Enabled
Calling Party Control or Loop Supervision.
(Receive), LED 03—Any digital or electronic telephone equipped for OCA should
be assigned this option to receive OCA.
This program does not affect the station’s
ability to originate OCA.
• Handsfree No Warning, LED 02—Normally, a 1-second warning tone is sent to a
handsfree digital or electronic telephone to
inform its user that someone is calling and
that they can be heard. If the warning tone
is not desired at the called digital or electronic telephone, this assignment can disable it. This will also prevent ringing the
digital or electronic telephone as a ring-first
situation, allowing silent room monitoring
of the area surrounding the telephone.
Initialized data activates the warning tone
for all ports.
• Handsfree Disabled, LED 01—It is possible to disable the intercom handsfree
function on any digital or electronic telephone.
• Group Page 1 ~ 4, LEDs 11 ~ 14—Inter-
•
•
•
•
com paging can be directed to digital and/
or electronic telephone speakers in a group
arrangement. Up to four groups are possible. This program assigns digital and
electronic telephones to the groups. Telephones can be assigned to as many groups
as desired.
All Call Page Allowed-Digital and Electronic Telephones, LED 10—Any station
may be allowed to receive an All Call page.
This does not alter the station’s ability to
initiate an All Call Page. Initialized data
allows every port to receive an All Call
page.
Voice Mail (VM) No Conference, LED
09—If activated, a station is prohibited from
having any conference calls. It should be
used for VM (PSTU and PESU) ports to
prevent undesirable conference calls.
Voice Mail (VM) Groups 1 ~ 4, LED 05 ~
08—The system allows up to four VM station port groups to be configured for support of up to four VM/auto attendant devices. One group is intended for each different machine. All PSTU and PESU ports
connected to a particular VM machine
should be assigned to the same VM group.
The purpose of the VM grouping is to allow
efficient use of the message waiting (MW)
set and cancel operations from the VM
machine. Since each digital and electronic
telephone can only have a maximum of
four messages waiting, the VM device
should set MW only once, regardless of
how many messages there are.
Voice Mail (VM) to VM Call Blocking,
LED 04 (Release 3 and Higher)—This
prevents VM/auto attendant ports from call
forwarding to other VM ports during
screened or supervised voice mail transfers. If auto attendant calls are screened or
supervised, this LED should be ON for all
VM/auto attendant ports; if VM/auto attendant calls are ring (blind) transferred, this
LED should be OFF for all VM/auto attendant ports.
Program 32—Automatic Preference: Automatic
Preference for digital or electronic telephones
(see Note 2) via handset off-hook or Speaker
button is the automatic connection to CO lines
or intercom under various conditions. With
Ringing Line Preference, a digital or electronic
telephone user by going off-hook (or by pressing the Speaker button) may be automatically
connected to the lowest CO line ringing in
without having to press a CO line button or dial
an access code. If no CO lines are ringing and
an electronic or digital telephone goes offhook, the station can be automatically connected to intercom or to a CO line. The CO line
connected can be the lowest numbered CO
line available on the telephone or the highest
idle CO line from a selected group (1 ~ 8).
NOTES:
1. The programming digital or electronic telephone at Port 05 is set to auto select an
intercom line any time system power is
turned OFF, then ON.
2. This program does not apply to standard
telephones. To allow system features to
be accessed, standard telephones always
receive system intercom dial tone when
2-15
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
originating calls.
busy answering position station will benefit
from this feature—some auto attendant
devices cannot transfer a call to a busy
station if BST and BSR are not activated.
Program 33—Station Hunting (Voice Calls
Only): If a station is busy, Station Hunting
allows the ringing of an alternate station as
defined by the assignments in this program. If
the "hunt-to" station is busy, the system will try
to ring the next "hunt-to" station, and so on. If
a "hunt-to" station is in the Call Forward mode,
the call forward will have priority over the hunt.
A CO Line will hunt from a station only if it has
been assigned to ring at that station exclusively (see Programs 81 ~ 89).
NOTE:
A BST station will receive ringback tone,
instead of busy tone, when transferring a call
to a busy BSR station.
• Auto Hold, LED 18 (Release 4)—If this
feature is allowed, station users with CO
line buttons can place a CO line or intercom call on hold, then call another CO line
or station just by pressing another CO line
button or the Intercom (INT) button and
dialing the number. If Auto Hold is not
allowed, users can put calls on hold and
place calls, but they will have to press the
Hold (HOLD) button before accessing
another CO or intercom line.
Program 34—Hold Recall/ParkTiming: Each station can have a different time (from 011 to 160
seconds) from the point of placing a call on
hold or park to the point of recall.
Program 35—Station Class of Service:
• Busy Station Transfer with LED 20 and
Busy Station Ringing with LED 19 (Release 4)—Busy Station Transfer (BST)
and Busy Station Ringing (BSR) operate
together to ensure that a busy digital or
electronic telephone station always receives transferred CO line calls along with
LED and tone indications. The station or
Voice mail(VM)/auto attendant device that
transfers the call must be programmed
with BST (LED 20 ON) and the one that
receives it must have have BSR (LED 19).
When a busy station with BSR receives a
transfer from a station or VM/auto attendant with BST, there will be a muted repetitive tone (1 second ON, 3 seconds OFF) at
the busy station and the intercom LED will
flash at the ringing rate until the station
transferring the call hangs up. When it
does hang up, the CO line call will then
camp-on to the busy station. The busy
station will be alerted of the camp-on by a
camp-on tone (five quick tone bursts), the
CO line LED will flash at the exclusive hold
rate, and a message ("CAMP-ON X", X =
the CO line number) will appear on the
LCD (if equipped). Among other applications, one in which a VM/auto attendant
device that transfers calls to a typically
NOTES:
1. CO lines or intercom calls that appear on
the intercom button will automatically hold
when accessing another CO line button.
2. it is recommended that the
ReleaseÍCall (RLS) button be provided
via Program 39 to telephones programmed for Auto Hold.
• No Call Forward/No Answer on Hands-
free Answerback Calls, LED 16 (Release
4)—A Handsfree Answerback call to an
idle station in the Call Forward No-Answer
or Call Forward-Busy/No Answer mode
will not forward if this feature is activated.
This prevents the call from being forwarded
12 seconds after the called party has been
talking. Outside calls and busy intercom
calls to the station will continue to forward
with this feature set.
NOTE:
The caller can press the "RING" Soft Key on
digital telephones or dial 1 on digital or electronic telephones to activate Call Forward on
Handsfree Answerback calls.
2-16
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• LCD Individual Message, LED 05—This
answer a call sent to it via call transfer, the
station originating the transfer will be recalled
after an amount of time determined with this
program. This time (011 ~ 999 seconds) is set
independently for each originating station. Initialized data sets all stations for a 32-second
recall time. Ring Transfer must first be enabled
for the system with Program 10-1, LED 07 ON.
option allows LCD digital and electronic
telephones to store up to ten personal
messages and offers the option of entering
alphanumeric memos for each of the LCD’s
Station Speed Dial numbers. As many as
16 stations can have this option with systems operating with a PCTU, and as many
as six stations can have it with PCTUSoperated systems. This program defines
which ports can have this feature. Initialized data assigns the lowest ports to have
this ability. A low port must be disabled
before adding a port above the initialized
ports.
• Message Waiting (RCV), LED 04—If the
message waiting indication is not desired
on an electronic or digital telephone, this
program can be used to deny it. This does
not affect that station’s ability to send a
message waiting indication to another station.
• LCD Type 32/12, LED 02—Digital and
6500-series LCD electronic telephones
have 32-character displays. Therefore,
assignments should be left in the initialized
state of 32 characters. LED 02 must be ON
to receive the voice mail message waiting
indication.
• LCD Display, LED 01—This option should
be used (LED 01 ON) for all stations (even
non-LCD), unless it is desired to disable
the station's LCD and message waiting
functions.
Program 38—Digital and Electronic Telephone
Buttonstrip Type: Three digital telephone and
four standard electronic telephone button arrangements are provided (see the Program
38 System Record Sheet). It is best to start with
one of these three or four, and then move on to
Program 39, where individual buttons may be
programmed. Initialized data with Release 4
systems treats all digital telephone ports as 20button types with 17 CO line buttons, one
intercom line button, one Do Not Disturb button, and the Speed Dial button. See the System Record Sheet for electronic telephone and
Release 3 digital telephone arrangements.
Program 39—Flexible Buttonstrip Assignment:
Program 38 should be run before entering
Program 39. Flexible feature buttons are assigned to telephones on a button-by-button
basis with Program 39. There are as many as
40 feature buttons to choose from (see the
System Record Sheet for details).
Program 40—Station CO Line Access: Any station can have access to as many CO lines as
desired. Any station denied access (either to
make a call or to answer a call) to a CO line
cannot seize that line by dialing either an
access or pickup code or by using a CO line
button. This also denies access via Least Cost
Routing. Use this program to divide CO lines
for Tenant Service.
Use Program 40 to deny CO line call
pickup. If only outgoing access is to be prevented, use Program 41.
Program 36—Fixed Call Forward: Fixed Call
Forwarding is different from other station Call
Forwarding options. It is fixed in terms of the
destination station number which is assigned
in this program. The station user cannot change
the Fixed Call Forward destination, unlike the
other station Call Forwarding options. This
feature is valuable for forwarding to voice mail
(VM) devices or to an attendant. If Fixed Call
Forwarding is set on a station, the station will
not ring and all calls will forward.
Program 41—Station Outgoing Call Restriction: Each station (or Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) CO line) can be restricted from
outgoing access to each CO line. If so re-
Program 37—Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall
Time: If a busy or ringing station does not
2-17
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
stricted, that station can still answer a ringing
CO line or pick up a call on hold. All Call Pickup
functions operate normally. This does not deny
access via LCR. Program 41 denies Automatic Busy Redial (ABR) in Release 1 software; but ABR overrides Program 41 in Release 2 and higher software.
should usually be 26, the sum of the digits
in the telephone (12) and credit card (14)
numbers.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
More digits than the length set in Program
60-7 are allowed to be dialed; there is no
limit to the amount of digits that can be
dialed.
Program 42—CO Line To PBX/CENTREX
Connection & PBX/CENTREX Access
Codes: The system recognizes PBX/
CENTREX access codes via Programs 42-1
~ 8. Program 42-0 informs the software which
CO lines are connected to a PBX or to
CENTREX. This combination allows Toll
Restriction and Speed Dialing to function
properly. This program must be utilized to
allow (after flash) PBX/CENTREX features to
operate on incoming calls.
Program 44A—Emergency Bypass of Verified
Account Code (Release 3 and Higher): This
program exempts numbers up to four digits,
such as the emergency 911 number, from
Verified Account Code dialing restrictions. As
many as three of these special numbers can be
programmed. When dialed, these numbers
will be sent out the CO line immediately, bypassing any Verified Account Code dialing
restrictions set in Programs 69 and 30, button/
LEDs 8 and 14, respectively. If CO lines are
behind CENTREX or PBX, program the appropriate 1- or 2-digit CENTREX/PBX trunk access code in front of the emergency number.
Example: If the PBX trunk access code is 9,
then program 9911 in Program 44A-51 to
allow 911 to bypass Forced Account Code dial
requirements.
Program 43—0+ Credit Card Dialing Option
(Release 3 and Higher): Selected station users can bypass their normal Toll Restriction
assignments by dialing "0" immediately after
seizing a CO line. Both the station and the CO
line must be enabled for this feature with this
program. After seizing the CO line, the station
user is required to dial a specific number of
digits, which includes the leading 0. This digitlength requirement forces the user to dial a
telephone number or a telephone number plus
a credit card number; as a result, these calls
are billed to the credit card, and operatorplaced calls are not billed to the CO line. The
digit length, 1 ~ 30 numbers, is set in Program
60-7. This length is determined by the system’s
call routing method.
• If calls are routed via Least Cost Routing
(LCR), the digit length should usually be
set at 12, the length, including 0, of the
telephone numbers dialed on 0+ credit
card calls. Do not add the amount of digits
in the credit card (usually 14), although
these numbers will be dialed by the user
after system LCR seizes the line and the
system dials the telephone number (see
Important Note).
• When not dialing via LCR, the digit length
NOTES:
1. If Verified Account Codes assigned in
Program 69 conflict (duplicate) with emergency or other type telephone numbers
set in Program 44A, Program 44A has
priority.
2. Toll Restriction and Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) parameters requirements
are not affected by this program.
Programs 45 ~ 48 Toll Restriction: All Toll Restriction program information is provided later
in this chapter.
Programs 50 ~ 56—Least Cost Routing: All
Least Cost Routing program information is
provided later in this chapter.
Program 60—SMDR Output/Account Code Digit
Length:
2-18
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• SMDR Threshold Time, Item 2 (Release
•
•
•
•
•
(Release 3 and Higher)—Station users
bypassing Toll Restriction with the “0+”
Credit Card Calling feature (Program 43)
must dial a predetermined number of digits
including the “0.” This predetermined number is established with Item 7, and can be
1 ~ 30 digits.
4)—The time that a call must be in progress
before it will register with SMDR can be set
to 1 or 10 seconds with Release 4. The
default is 10 seconds. With previous releases, the time is always 10 seconds.
SMDR Output, Item 3—System output to
a Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) device can include information for
both incoming and outgoing calls, or only
for outgoing calls. Local and long distance
call data will be sent out.
Forced/Voluntary/Verified Account
Code Digit Length, Item 4—The Account
Code entered at a station can vary in length
from 4 ~ 15 digits. For Forced Account
Code use, a call will not be completed
unless the specified number of digits is
entered by a station user. In the case of
Voluntary Account Codes, the Account
Code will not be sent to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record
unless the specified number of digits is
dialed. See Program 69 for Verified Account Codes.
Station Message Detail Recording
(SMDR) Printout Options, Item 5 (Release 2 and Higher)—This option selectively deletes local call data and allows
long distance/toll call data only to be sent
out the SMDR port. The type of long distance/toll call data that prints out is selected by long distance prefix codes 0, 1,
00, or 1 or 0.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Security Code, Item 6 (Release 2 and
Higher)—The optional security code (1 ~
15 digits) is required for incoming DISA
calls to access outgoing CO lines. If the
DISA security code is not set in programming, DISA users can access outgoing CO
lines without dialing a security code. This
code is not required for DISA/DISC internal
calls to stations. The DISA security code
can also be changed from stations enabled
in Program 30. DISA access of outgoing
CO calls is available with Release 2 and
higher software only.
Credit Card Call Digit Length, Item 07
Program 69—Verified Account Codes (Release
3 and Higher): Up to 300 Verified Account
Codes may be added, deleted, or changed
with Program 69. Each Verified Account Code
can be 1 ~ 15 digits long, but cannot exceed the
Account Code length requirement set in Program 60-4. The following programs and options should be considered when establishing
Verified Account Codes.
• Account Code Digit Length—Program
60-4 sets the digit length that must be
dialed for all account codes: Forced (Verified/Nonverified) and Voluntary (Verified/
Nonverified).
• Full and Partially Verified Account
Codes (Release 3 and Higher)—Verified
Account Codes can contain the same number of digits (full Verified Account Code) or
less (partially Verified Account Code) than
the length set in Program 60-4. If partially
verified, the first part of the Account Code
is verified and the remainder is not. For
example, if Verified Account Code 2734 is
set in Program 69, but the digit length is set
to eight in Program 60-4, then the user
must dial 2734 plus any other four digits to
enter a partially Verified Account Code.
There are many applications for partially
Verified Account Codes. For instance, using the code in the example above, the
numbers 2734 could be the user’s dial
restriction code and the remaining four
digits could be a customer-client code, a
sales order, etc.
• Verifed Account Code Toll Restriction
Assignments (Release 3 and Higher)—
A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned
with Program 70 to each of the 300 Verified Account Codes .
• Verified Account Code Dial Requirement (Release 3 and Higher)—Verified
2-19
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
Account Code Dial Requirement is assigned on a station-by-station basis in Program 30, LED 14 ON. All Account Codes
dialed (Forced or Voluntary) from stations
assigned in this program will be verified.
• Code Change (Release 3 and Higher)—
Stations selected in Program 30, LED 15
ON, can change Verified Account Codes
(VAC) by dialing the following:
Intercom (INT) + 6 5 9 + 0 0 0 ~ 2 9
9 + VAC + Redial (REDIAL)
• Verified Account Codes: Forced/Voluntary Program Options (Release 3 and
Higher)—Any station can dial a Voluntary
Account Code after accessing a CO line—
CONF/TRNS 4 6; or, with Release 3 and
higher, dial * 5 0 or press the
AccountÍCode (ACCNT) button.
Forced Account Code requirements are
assigned via station and CO line program
options: stations are assigned in Program
30, LED 08 ON; and CO lines are assigned
in Program 15-7. Stations must dial Verified Account Codes when assigned in Program 30, LED 14 ON. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) callers that access
outgoing CO lines can be required to enter
Verified Account Codes with Program 30
(LED 08 ON for Port 99).
VACs 101 ~ 150 = Class 1
etc.
Program 77-1—Peripheral Options
• Door Lock Time, LED 20—The Door Lock
Relay contact may be programmed to operate for either three or six seconds (applies to PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, DDCB, and
HDCB door lock controls).
• Port Number/Door Phone/Lock Control
Units, LEDs 16 ~ 19 (Release 2 and
higher)—Door phone/lock existence is defined by this program. Door phone/lock
controllers (DDCBs and/or HDCBs) can
only exist at Ports 04, 12, 20 and 28, and
can only be installed on Circuit 5 of a
PDKU, PEKU and/or PESU. PDKUs support DDCBs, but not HDCBs. PEKUs and
PESUs can support HDCBs, but not
DDCBs. After assignment of a DDCB or
HDCB, door phone numbers (151 ~ 159,
161 ~ 163) will effectively replace the station number assignment in Program 04.
The door lock option is set via Program 772.
NOTES:
1. DDCBs are available only with Release 4.
2. HDCB4, port 28, is not available with
PCTUS.
• IMDU Modem, LED 14—Informs the soft-
Program 70—Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments (Release 3 and
Higher): A Toll Restriction Class can be assigned with this program to each of the 300
Verified Account Codes assigned in Program
69. Therefore, when a Forced Verified Account
Code is dialed at a station, the station temporarily assumes the Toll Restriction Class assigned to the Verified Account Code. When
Program 70 is initialized, all Verified Account
Codes are assigned as not Toll Restricted
(data = 00). Verified Account Code Toll Restriction class assignments are not user programmable; so if the assignments are not
known, it is recommended to assign a number
(block) of Verified Account Codes to each type
of Toll Restriction class. For example:
VACs 000 ~ 050 = no restriction
VACs 051 ~ 100 = total restriction
ware that an internal Remote Maintenance
modem (IMDU) is installed. Its station number is 19 (unless the access code prefix
has been changed with Program 05).
• Night Ringing over External Page Zones,
LEDs 10 ~ 13 (Release 3 and Higher):
Tenant 1 or Tenant 2 CO lines can be
selected with this program to selectively
night ring external page zones. For this
feature to work, the appropriate CO lines
must be programmed to night ring over
external page in Program 78. Tenant assignments are made in Program 15.
NOTE:
The PIOU option PCB must be installed to
allow this option.
• Door Phone Ring On External Page,
2-20
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
LED 08—If a door phone button is pressed,
a ring tone can be enabled or disabled to
external paging when the system is in the
NIGHT mode. Activation of a Tenant 1
NightÍTransfer (NT) button is required
to activate this feature. The Tenant 2
NightÍTransfer (NT) button does not
apply to door phones.
• Door Lock Relay/External Page Relay,
LED 07—A relay on the PIOU, PIOUS, or
PEPU can be assigned to operate with the
Door Lock function or with External Page
for mute control. The door lock button is
assigned in Program 39; the door lock
activation time is assigned in Program 771. This door lock function is not associated
with the DDCB or HDCB door lock, but is an
addition to them.
• NT Relay, LED 06—A relay located on the
PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU can be assigned to
operate in one of two Night Transfer modes
(see next item, MOH/NT Relay). In one
mode, the relay will activate for 1 second,
then be idle for 3 seconds when a CO line
rings (incoming) while the system is in the
NIGHT mode. The intended application is
to control an external ringing device at
night. Program 78 must have Ring Over
External Page activated for this feature. In
the second mode, the relay will operate
continuously while the NIGHT mode is
activated. One application for this mode is
to control an external answering machine.
• MOH/NT Relay, LED 05—A relay on the
PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU can be assigned to
operate in one of two applications. A choice
must be made between use for Night Transfer application (see NT Relay, LED 06) or
Music-on-Hold (MOH). If used for MOH,
the relay will activate when any CO line or
station is placed on hold. The intended
application is to control a tape player which
can be used as a Music-on-Hold source.
phones is set with this LED. Light the LED
for one ring; turn it OFF for five rings. The
default is five rings. See Program 79 to
assign which telephones will be rung by
door phones.
• Door Phone Busy Out, LEDs 01, 02, 03,
05, 06, 07, 09, 10, 11, 13, 14, and 15—
Each door phone controller (DDCB or
HDCB) can interface with up to three door
phones. The system treats each controller
as a station. Therefore, this is quite different from all other station arrangements
using telephones. The system does not
automatically know how many door phones
are connected to each DDCB or HDCB, so
it must be told. This program is used to
enter that information so that a caller will
receive fast busy tone if the called door
phone does not exist. Door phones 1A, 1B,
1C are numbered 151, 152, 153, respectively, and are connected to the DDCB or
HDCB at Port 04. Door phones 2A, 2B, 2C
are numbered 154, 155, 156, respectively,
and are connected to the DDCB or HDCB
at port 12, etc.
• Door Lock Assignments, LEDs 04, 08,
12, and 16 (Release 2 and Higher)—
Each B-jack on the DDCB and HDCB output can be configured for door lock control.
Door lock control buttons for door locks are
assigned to electronic or digital telephones
in Program 39. Door lock activation time is
set in Program 77-1. A maximum of four
DDCB/HDCB door lock controls are available with a PCTU PCB; three are available
with a PCTUS PCB. Each DDCB requires
one PDKU circuit, and each HDCB requires one PEKU or PESU electronic telephone circuit. These door locks are not
associated with, but are in addition to, the
door lock control provided by the PIOU,
PIOUS, or PEPU PCB. DDCBs are available with Release 4 only.
Program 77-2—Door Phone and Door Lock
Assignments:
• Door Phone Ring Count, LED 20 (Release 4)—The number of times that a door
phone will ring digital and electronic tele-
Program 78—CO Line Special Ringing Assignments:
• Ring Over External Page During Night
Mode, Feature 1—This program selects
which CO lines will activate ringing over
2-21
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
external paging facilities during the NIGHT
mode (for Tenants 1 and 2). The NT Relay
on the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU will also be
activated if it is in the 1-second ON/3seconds OFF mode.
• DISA/DISC CO Line Assignment, Feature 2—This program assigns CO lines to
be used with the Direct Inward Station
Calling (DISC) and the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features. These CO
lines may be set for DISC/DISA operation
during the different system modes of DAY,
DAY2, and NIGHT. A CO line will switch to
normal ringing after ten seconds if the
outside caller does not use the DISA/DISC
feature. Normal function of these lines occurs for outgoing calls. DISA, which allows
outgoing CO line access and internal station calling, is available with Release 2 and
higher software only.
phone A, B, and C numbering scheme.
Program 80—Electronic and Digital Telephone
Ringing Tones: Distinctive system ringing
sends a different ring tone for CO line ringing
than that for intercom ringing. In addition, CO
line ringing at electronic and digital telephones
can be different from one phone to another.
Two choices are available with Program 80;
one is 500 Hz modulated with 640 Hz (PERCEPTION ring tone), while the other is 600 Hz
modulated with 800 Hz (STRATA ring tone).
Two electronic or digital telephones that are
close in proximity can then have distinctive CO
line ringing, as chosen with this program.
Programs 81 ~ 89—CO Line Ringing Assignments: A wide variety of CO line ringing to
stations can be programmed into the system.
Nine categories exist, which are DAY IMMEDIATE, DAY DELAY 1, DAY DELAY 2, DAY2
IMMEDIATE, DAY2 DELAY 1, DAY2 DELAY
2, NIGHT IMMEDIATE, NIGHT DELAY 1, and
NIGHT DELAY 2. DAY, DAY2 and NIGHT
refer to the three modes of the Night Transfer
key. DELAY 1 is a 12-second delay of ringing
signal to an electronic or digital telephone, and
DELAY 2 is a 24-second delay of ringing. The
delay functions are mainly used in CENTREX
applications but can be used for other situations. If delayed ringing occurs, the station
that initially rings will continue to ring with
subsequent delayed ring stations.
NOTE:
An optional security code for DISA outgoing
CO calls is available via Program 60-6.
• Ring IMDU Maintenance Modem, Fea-
ture 5—IMDU Remote Maintenance modem can be accomplished with this program. Different alternatives are available
for the system modes of DAY, DAY2, and
NIGHT. If none of these are selected, the
IMDU can still be reached on Station 19
with the DISC/DISA feature or by a Ring
Transfer from the DSS console attendant
or any other station. IMDU station 19 must
be enabled with Program 77-1.
Program 93—CO Line Identification: This program assigns alphanumeric names (such as
"WATS BAND 5", "FX TO NY", "MR JONES",
etc) to CO lines. The names may be up to 16
characters each, and display when the CO line
is being used by an LCD station.
Program 79—Door Phone Ringing:
• Muted Ring to Busy Electronic and Digital Telephone, LED 20—If all electronic
and digital telephones are busy and a door
phone button is pressed, a muted ring tone
can be sent to selected digital and electronic telephones, as defined with this program. (Only the lowest port in the appropriate ringing group will mute ring.)
• Door Phone Ring, LEDs 01 ~ 12—When
a door phone button is pressed, selected
digital and/or electronic telephones will ring
as assigned with this program. See Program 77-2 for an explanation of the door
Program 97—Printing Program Data Through
SMDR: Contents of each program can be sent
to the SMDR port for a hard copy printout.
Setting Date, Time and Day: The current date,
time, and day of the week can be set from an
electronic or digital telephone connected to
Port 00 (usually Station 200). The programming electronic or digital telephone at Port 05.
2-22
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
cannot make these settings.
3.11 For description purposes, Toll Restriction is
divided into several components, or subfeatures.
The subfeatures operate independently of the
restriction methods just described, although they
may employ these methods.
2 TOLL RESTRICTION
2.01 The following provides the programmer with
an overview of the Toll Restriction feature and
step-by-step instructions to fill in the Toll Restriction System Record Sheets.
3.12 Station Priority Classes 1 ~ 4: Four classes
of Toll Restriction can be defined to assign different levels of priority to individual stations. Classes
can be defined so each is progressively more
restrictive by allowing or denying specific area or
office codes, calls to long distance information,
international calls, and operator assisted calls
(Programs 46-10 ~ 40).
3 TOLL RESTRICTION OVERVIEW
3.00 Toll Restriction Methods
3.01 Toll Restriction screens and selectively restricts outgoing calls using three different methods. Each type of restriction can be programmed
for individual stations. Toll Restriction can also be
enabled/disabled for each outgoing CO line in the
system.
3.13 Office Code Exception Tables: Class 1 ~ 4
restrictions can be further modified by defining as
many as eight exception tables to allow or deny
access to specific office codes that fall within
previously restricted area codes (Program 47).
Exception office code access is accomplished with
the Six-digit Toll Restriction method described
earlier.
3.02 Simple Toll Restriction: The first method,
Simple Toll Restriction, only involves the first digit
dialed. The system can be programmed to reject
outgoing calls beginning with 0 or 1 (see Program
48).
3.14 Emergency, Information, and Toll-free
Long Distance Toll Restriction Override: Toll
Restricted stations may be allowed to dial special
codes such as 911 for emergency response, 1-411
or 411 for information, or 800 prefix toll-free calls
(Program 46).
3.03 Three-digit Toll Restriction: The second
method, Three-digit Toll Restriction, involves the
system analyzing the area code dialed, and selectively allowing/disallowing outgoing calls following
the criteria defined in Area Code Tables 1 ~ 4 (see
Program 46, Codes 2 ~ 4).
IMPORTANT!
Always be sure to provide access to emergency numbers such as 911.
3.04 Six-digit Toll Restriction: The third method,
Six-digit Toll Restriction, involves the system analyzing the area code and the office code, and
selectively allowing/disallowing outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code Tables 1
~ 4 and Office Code Tables 1 ~ 4 (see Program 46,
codes 2 ~ 4 and 6 ~ 8).
3.15 Toll Restriction Override by System Speed
Dial: System speed dial numbers can be programmed to override toll restriction (see Basic
System Features, Program 10-1).
NOTE:
Standard telephones that are Toll Restricted
should always be forced to use Least Cost
Routing (LCR) to place outside calls. This will
prevent Toll Restriction defeat when the CRCU
circuit times out.
3.16 Toll Restriction/Traveling Class Override
Codes: Up to two Toll Restriction Override Codes
can be defined. When dialed at a toll restricted
station, these codes enable the station user to
override toll restrictions defined at the station (Program 44B or 45-8 ~ 9). Codes may be changed by
stations chosen in programming (see Basic System Features, Program 30).
3.10 Toll Restriction Features
2-23
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
ing sequence of long distance/local calls made
from the system’s home area code, and identify
area and office codes. The dialing plan defines
several components of a telephone number for
long distance calling:
• Long Distance Prefix 1—In most areas, a 1
must be the first digit dialed for long distance
calling. In such areas, the area code is dialed
right away. The dial plan defines whether the
prefix 1 is required for a particular installation’s
long distance calling.
• Area/Office Code Numbering Schemes—In
most places, the middle digit of an area code is
0 or 1, and the middle digit of an office code is
2 ~ 9. Toll Restriction examines the first threedigit sequence dialed and determines whether
it is an area code or an office code.
§ If the middle digit is 0 or 1, then the sequence is an area code.
§ If the middle digit does not equal 0 or 1,
then the sequence is an office code, and
the office code parameters of the selected
dialing plan apply.
3.17 Special Common Carrier Authorization:
Toll Restriction can be programmed to recognize
Other Common Carrier (OCC) telephone numbers, directory numbers, authorization codes, and
PBX access codes. The system starts inspecting
numbers for toll restriction purposes after the recognizable code is dialed (Program 45-3 ~ 6).
4 COMPLETING THE TOLL
RESTRICTION SYSTEM RECORD
4.01 The following instructions explain how to
complete System Record Sheets used to program
the Toll Restriction feature. They are arranged in
the same order in which the tables appear in the
Toll Restriction System Record Sheets. The following instructions are intended to give a concise
general definition of the programming characteristics defined by each record sheet.
NOTES:
1. On each record sheet, mark an X in the
space provided to indicate that a choice is
selected. Unless otherwise specified, this
indicates the LED is lit. When appropriate,
indicate digits to be entered using the
station dialpad.
2. Initialized data and considerations are
documented when applicable.
4.11 Each of the four Toll Restriction classes
established in Program 46 can be assigned a
code with this program. If one of these codes is
entered at a station, the station will assume the
code’s class for that call. When the call is complete, the station returns to its regular class assigned in Program 48. The Traveling Class code
data is not sent out the SMDR port and will not print
out on station call records.
4.22 An exception to this rule exists. In some
places, area and office codes are interchangeable. The middle digit is always 0 or 1 (see Code
3 selection). In such a case, the system only knows
that three digits dialed are an area code if 1 is
dialed before them. If 1 is not dialed first, the
system knows the three digits are an office code.
The dial plan defines the numbering scheme applicable to the installation site.
• Office Codes: Office Code elements are defined as follows:
§ N=2~9
§ X=0~9
§ NXX = interchangeable with area code;
2nd digit may be 0 or 1.
§ NNX = not interchangeable with area code;
2nd digit may not be 0 or 1.
NOTE:
Stations selected in Program 30, LED 16
ON, can add, change, or delete the codes set
in Program 44B.
4.23 Equal Access Codes and Special Common
Carrier Authorization Codes may be entered as
exceptions to the dialing plan in Program 45-3 ~ 6.
4.10 Program 44B—Toll Restriction/Traveling
Class Override Codes (Release 3 and Higher)
4.20 Program 45-1—Toll Restriction Dial Plan
4.24 Selections: On the record sheet for Program 45-1, choose one of the following dial plans
by marking an X in the space next to the code.
4.21 A dial plan must be defined for the Toll
Restriction software to recognize the typical dial-
2-24
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• Plan 1 for dialing plan AC+NNX/1+NNX with
•
•
•
•
be selected if the installation is in a location
where a user places a long distance call to a
destination outside the area code by dialing a
1 before dialing the area code. The user places
a long distance call to a destination in the same
area code by simply dialing the number, without a 1 in front. The area and office codes may
be interchangeable. The system differentiates
between them whenever it sees the digit 1
dialed.
• When using this plan, the system recognizes
the following:
§ If 1 is the first number dialed in an 11-digit
string, the next three digits are an area
code.
§ A ten-digit string is not recognized.
§ The first three digits in a seven-digit string
are an office code. (There is no distinction
between local call dialing and long distance dialing within the area code.)
§ Digits 5 ~ 7 in an 11-digit string may be an
interchangeable office code as well.
• Plans 4 and 5 are not used in the United
States.
Release 1 and 2 or AC+NXX/1+NNX with
Release 3 and higher should be selected if the
installa-tion is in a location where a user places
a long distance call to a destination outside the
area code without dialing 1 before dialing the
area code. The user places a long distance call
to a destination in the same area code by
dialing 1 directly before the office code.
When using this plan, the system recognizes
the following:
§ The first three digits of a ten-digit number is
an area code if the middle digit is 0 or 1.
§ With Release 1 and 2, the first three digits
dialed immediately after a 1 in an eightdigit string are a non-interchangeable office code (the middle digit must be 2 ~ 9);
or, with Release 3 and higher, the first
three digits dialed immediately after a 1 in
an eight-digit string is an interchangeable
office code (the middle digit may be 0 or 1).
§ A seven-digit string starting with an office
code is a local call.
§ An 11-digit string is not recognized.
Plan 2 for dialing plan 1+AC+NNX/1+NNX
with Release 1 and 2 or 1+AC+NXX/1+NNX
with Release 3 should be selected if the installation is in a location where a user places a long
distance call to a destination outside the area
code by dialing a 1 before dialing the area
code. The user places a long distance call to a
destination in the same area code by dialing a
1 directly before the office code
When using this plan, the system recognizes
the following:
§ The first three digits following a 1 in an 11digit number are an area code, if the middle
digit is 0 or 1.
§ With Release 1 and 2, the first three digits
dialed after a 1 in an eight-digit string are a
non-interchangeable office code (the
middle digit must be 2 ~ 9); or, with Release 3, the first three digits dialed immediately after a 1 in an eight-digit string is an
interchangeable office code (the middle
digit may be 0 or 1).
§ Digits 5 ~ 7 in an 11-digit string may be an
interchangeable office code as well.
Plan 3 for dialing plan 1+AC+NXX/NNX should
NOTE:
Program 45-1 must be completed for the
Least Cost Routing feature to function properly. See LCR Program 50-1.
4.30 Program 45-2—Toll Restriction Disable
4.31 Selected CO lines may be programmed to be
exempt from any toll restrictions defined in this
section. Mark the exempt CO lines with an X on the
record sheet. Initialized data leaves all LEDs off,
which causes all CO lines to be affected by toll
restrictions defined.
NOTE:
Toll Restrictions disabled in this program
override station toll restrictions defined in
Program 48.
4.40 Program 45-3 ~ 6—Equal Access/Special
Common Carrier Numbers and Authorization
Code Digit Length
2-25
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
4.41 The purpose of this program is to notify the
system of how many digits to ignore before it
applies Toll Restriction. This enables the system to
allow the use of Special Common Carrier authorization codes.
that has the same first five digits as the carrier, the
system will assume the SPCC is being called.
IMPORTANT NOTE!
For items 4 and 6, do not enter more digits
than necessary for the authorization code.
If too many digits are allowed, toll restrictions may be ignored.
4.42 Special Common Carrier (SPCC) telephone
numbers may be defined to notify the system to
modify restrictions when the station user is dialing
a long distance carrier. The user dials a code to
access the carriers. Original restrictions re-activate after the carrier number is dialed.
4.50 Program 45-8 ~ 9—Toll Restriction
Override Code
4.51 Two different codes may be dialed by any
station user to override station-specific restrictions.
4.43 There are two elements toll restriction software must verify for a user to successfully complete long distance calling:
• The first five digits of the number dialed to
access the long distance special common carrier (SPCC).
• The total number of digits belonging to the
authorization code of the SPCC.
4.52 Fill in the codes on the record sheet. They
must be four digits each.
4.53 Selected stations in the system are able to
alter the override code. These stations are defined
by Program 30. To change the codes from selected stations:
Code 1: Intercom (INT) + 6 5 4 + code +
Redial (REDIAL)
Code 2: Intercom (INT) + 6 5 5 + code +
Redial (REDIAL)
4.44 Items 3 and 5: Enter the first five digits of the
SPCC telephone number in the spaces labeled
SPCC1 Telephone Number (item 3) or SPCC2
Telephone Number (item 5) on the record sheet.
The initialized state assigns “00000” to items 3 and
5.
NOTE:
The # button can be used instead of the
Redial (REDIAL) button.
4.45 Items 4 and 6: Enter each SPCC’s authorization code digit length. The number of digits
allowed (including the first five specified in items 3
and 5) ranges from 00 ~ 99. Initialized data assigns
“00” to items 4 and 6. Enter two digits on the record
sheet.
4.60 Program 46-2 ~ 4—Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Area Codes Assigned by Class
4.61 Four Toll Restriction classes can be defined
for the system. Each class area code provides for
a different combination of restrictions.
4.46 A restricted station is not able to place a toll
call through a long distance carrier by dialing the
SPCC1 or SPCC2 telephone number if the station
is denied from that number in other toll restriction
programs. Upon recognizing the first five digits
dialed, Toll Restriction software is notified to allow
the number of digits programmed in items 4 or 6
(00 ~ 99, including the first five dialed as SPCC1 or
2).
4.62 This program defines the area codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction class.
Area code tables for classes 1 ~ 4 can each
describe area codes that are allowed or denied for
the class. The tables (in memory) operate as allow
tables. If an area code exists in a table (displays
with 4 #), then it is allowed. Anything not displaying is not allowed. Initialized data allows all area
codes for each class (all codes are in all tables). All
allowed area codes can be displayed (4 #) for
each class.
4.47 The system interprets data to be a sevendigit local call to an SPCC. Only five digits of the
seven-digit number are entered; therefore, the last
two digits are don’t care digits. Any number dialed
2-26
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
IMPORTANT NOTE!
To allow 0 + dialing (LED 01 must be off),
codes 020 ~ 099 must be allowed in Program 46, and digit free must be allowed in
Program 48. Warning—Allowing 0 + dialing also allows operator-assisted toll calls.
4.63 For each class, choose whether the record
table is used to record allowed area codes in
memory (ALLOWED) or denied area codes not in
memory (DENIED). Enter the area codes that
define the set.
• LED 02: 01 Restricted—Mark an X next to
4.70 Program 46-6 ~ 8—Toll Restriction
Allowed/Denied Office Codes Assigned by
Class
LED 02 if overseas operator or unassisted
overseas operator calls are restricted for the
class being defined.
• LED 03: 1+AC+555 and AC+555 Allowed—
Mark an X next to LED 03 to allow the particular
class to call all restricted area codes plus the
office code of 555, including out-of-area directory assistance calls. Turning the LED off does
not necessarily deny information calls. This
may also be accomplished in the office code
table and/or the area/office code exception
tables.
• LEDs 11 ~ 18: Area Code/Office Code Exception Tables 1 ~ 8—Select the exception
tables that apply to the class being defined by
marking an X in the box. Exception tables for
both area and office codes will be defined in
Program 47.
4.71 This program defines the office codes allowed or denied for each Toll Restriction Class
within the home area code. Office code tables for
classes 1 ~ 4 can each describe office codes
allowed or denied for the class. The tables (in
memory) operate as allow tables. If an office code
exists in a table (displays with 8 #), then it is
allowed. Anything not displaying is not allowed.
Initialized data allows all office codes in the home
area code for each class.
4.72 For each class, choose whether the record
table is used to record allowed office codes in
memory (ALLOWED) or denied office codes not in
memory (DENIED). Enter the office codes that
define the set.
NOTE:
Each class can be assigned any or all of the
eight available office code exception tables.
4.80 Program 46-10 ~ 40—Toll Restriction Class
Parameters (Classes 1 ~ 4)
4.81 This program defines parameters of each
Toll Restriction class, including dialing plan restrictions and exceptions to previous restrictions.
4.90 Program 47—Toll Restriction Exception
Office Codes Assigned by Area Codes (Table 1
~ 8)
4.82 Toll Restriction exceptions and dialing plan
restrictions may be defined for each class. Program 46-10 assigns class 1 restriction exceptions
and parameters; 46-20 assigns class 2; 46-30
assigns class 3; 46-40 assigns class 4. This program also relates to Program 47. See Program
47 for more explanation.
4.91 This program defines exceptions to previously defined office code restrictions for up to eight
area codes, allowing six-digit Toll Restriction. Office codes entered in Tables 1 ~ 8 are opposite of
what is defined for the area code by Program 462 ~ 8. For instance, if Program 46 denies area
code 714, entering office codes 530 and 555 into
an exception table for area code 714 will allow
those office codes.
4.83 To define the proper parameters for a Toll
Restriction class, make the appropriate selections
on the record sheet designated for classes 1 ~ 4:
• LED 01: 0 Restricted—Mark an X next to LED
01 if operator or operator-assisted calls are
restricted for the class being defined.
4.92 Eight exception tables are available. Each
area code with exception office codes requires a
table. Each table may hold up to 800 exception
office codes.
2-27
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
4.93 Enter the area code and required office codes
on the record sheet.
•
4.100 Program 48—Station Toll Restriction
Classification
4.101 This program assigns a combination of two
restrictions to each station port defined in the
system. The first feature is Digit Restriction and the
second is Station Restriction Assignment.
4.102 Digit Restrict Code: If Digit Restrict is
enabled for a particular station, the station is able
to dial the number of digits defined in the Program
45-1 toll restriction dialing plan.
• 1: Enable Digit Restriction—Enter 1 in the
Digit Restrict Code column, next to the port
number to enable the restriction for the station.
This is used to prevent a user from dialing a
second call when dial tone is returned from a
CO after the outside party disconnects.
• 2: Disable Digit Restriction—Enter 0 in the
Digit Restrict Code column, next to the port
number to disable digit restriction for the station. This allows toll restricted users to dial any
number of digits (i.e., to an external voice mail
device, computer, etc.).
•
•
4.103 Station Restrict Code: The second feature assigns Toll Restriction to individual station
ports, in addition to previous restrictions. It includes seven different choices. One of the choices
must be entered for each port. Initialized data
assigns 0 or no restrictions to all ports. The seven
choices are explained as follows.
•
NOTE:
Station restrictions are overridden by CO
lines disabled as defined in Program 45-2. If
a station port has appearance of a CO line
with restrictions disabled, the restrictions will
be removed from the station on an individual
CO line basis through Program 45-2.
•
Station Restrict Code column, next to the port
number If the selected station must be restricted from dialing all area codes.
2: Area Code Toll Restriction and “0” or “1”
as a 1st or 2nd Digit—Enter 2 in the Station
Restrict Code column, in the space available
for the port number, if the selected station must
be restricted from dialing all area codes, and 0
or 1 when used as a first or second digit. This
restriction prevents the station from making
any long distance calls or operator-assisted
calls, in addition to outgoing calls outside the
home area code. In applicable areas, this
prevents long distance office codes from being
dialed (if 1+NNX).
3: Class 1 Toll Restriction—Enter 3 in the
Station Restrict Code column in the space
provided for the port number, if the selected
station will be assigned to the Class 1 level of
restriction. Class 1 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and
exception office code tables in 46-10.
4: Class 2 Toll Restriction—Enter 4 in the
Station Restrict Code column in the space
provided for the port number, if the selected
station will be assigned to the Class 2 level of
restriction. Class 2 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and
exception office code tables in 46-20.
5: Class 3 Toll Restriction—Enter 5 in the
Station Restrict Code column in the space
provided for the port number, if the selected
station will be assigned to the Class 3 level of
restriction. Class 3 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and
exception office code tables in 46-30.
6: Class 4 Toll Restriction—Enter 6 in the
Station Restrict Code column in the space
provided for the port number, if the selected
station will be assigned to the Class 4 level of
restriction. Class 4 area and office code restrictions are defined in Program 46, and
exception office code tables in 46-40.
• 0: No Station Toll Restriction—Enter 0 in the
Station Restrict Code column, next to the port
number, to remove toll restrictions from the
station.
• 1: Area Code Toll Restriction—Enter 1 in the
5 LEAST COST ROUTING
5.01 The following provides the programmer an
overview of the Least Cost Routing feature and
2-28
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
step-by-step instructions to fill in the Least Cost
Routing System Record Sheets.
Notifies the system of the time delay to the user
after dialing a 0, before a regular operator is
accessed.
6 LEAST COST ROUTING OVERVIEW
6.08 LCR Area Codes: As many as eight separate area code tables can be defined; one for each
available call routing plan. Each table defines the
area codes that are handled by the particular
routing plan.
6.00 Definition
6.01 The Least Cost Routing (LCR) feature enables the system to automatically route each outgoing voice and data call over common carriers
and selected CO lines. The customer chooses
these lines for the specific time of day, and for
system users with varying priorities. If the system
is programmed properly, LCR can select the most
economical route, helping save money. If the best
routes are unavailable, users with priority can
access more expensive outgoing routes. Several
elements of LCR must be defined in programming.
6.09 LCR Office Code Exceptions for Area
Codes: As many as eight LCR office code exception tables may be defined to inform LCR software
how to handle specific office codes within area
codes. According to the tables defined, specific
exception office codes can be routed through a
different call plan than the overall area code plan.
6.10 LCR Schedule Assignments: Call routing
plans 1 ~ 8 can send the outgoing calls of different
groups of stations according to a time schedule,
and call route definitions.
NOTE:
For LCR to function properly, CO line groups
must be created in Program 16; CO line
restrictions set in Programs 40 and 41; and
the area dialing plan assigned in Program
45-1.
6.11 LCR Route Definitions: Groups of CO lines
assigned to special common carriers, foreign exchange lines, or other special services can be
specified as call routes.
6.02 LCR General Parameters: Enables features
including a warning tone for last choice route
number, a comfort dial tone during LCR processing, and the Long Distance Information dialing
plan.
6.12 LCR Modified Digit Assignments: Carrier
codes can be programmed to dial automatically
when a call is placed over the appropriate route.
Digits can be added to the front or back of special
common carrier codes or other access numbers to
make placing calls an invisible process for the
user. Digits may also be deleted from the front of
the dialed number.
6.03 LCR Home Area Code: Notifies LCR software of the area code of the installation site.
6.04 LCR Special Codes: Notifies LCR of special
emergency and operator codes that will be automatically routed as a local call, without unnecessary delay.
6.13 LCR Station Access Priority Assignments:
Each station port defined in the system may be
assigned to one of four station priority groups. The
groups can have varying access to the defined call
routes at different times of day. Each group is
partitioned from the other groups.
6.05 Long Distance Information Plan Number:
Notifies LCR software how to route a long distance
information call.
6.20 Conditions
6.06 Local Call Plan Number: Notifies LCR software which call routing plan is specifically designed to handle local and special calls.
6.21 A number of conditions apply to LCR assignment. A summary of each is listed here. Paragraph
7, Completing the Least Cost Routing Record
6.07 LCR Timeout after 0 (Zero) is Dialed:
2-29
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
User dials 9.
User dials telephone number (see note).
System analyzes telephone number, and
checks it against most Program 50 options.
• LCR Parameters (50-1)
• LCR Special Codes (50-31 ~ 35)
• LCR Long Distance Information Plan
Number (50-4)
• LCR Local Call Plan Number (50-5)
• LCR Dial Zero Time Out (50-6)
Does system
find a match?
NOTE:
If the telephone number is restricted by system
Toll Restriction, the caller will receive busy tone
and LCR will be cancelled immediately.
Routes call per the local LCR plan
specified in 50-5 or per long distance
information LCR plan specified per 50-4.
YES
System checks the time of day. (This must
be set properly by station port 00.)
NO
Selects the appropriate schedule (1, 2 or 3)
for the time as specified in Program 53.
System searches all office code exception
tables entered into LCR plans 1 ~ 8 with
Program 52.
Does system
find a match?
YES
Routes call per the plan cross referenced
by the LCR office code exception table that
contains the match (52-X0; X = 1-8).
Determines the station's group assignment
as specified in Program 56. Within the
Time of Day Schedule, an LCR station
group is matched to group 1, 2, 3 or 4.
NO
System checks the number to see
if it is an area code or an office code.
Is number
an office
code?
System assumes home area code and
routes call per the LCR plan containing
the home area code (Program 51).
YES
NO
Verifies the CO line access, as defined by
Program 40. Within a CO line group, the
system checks to see if access is allowed
to lines chosen in selected route definition.
System checks all area code
tables entered into the LCR plans
1 ~ 8 through Program 51.
Routes call per the
applicable LCR plan.
Does system
find a match?
Selects the route definition as defined
by Program 54 for the CO line group
(Program 16), and activates the modified
digits table instructions defined through
Program 55.
The system selects the first available route
definition (1st, 2nd, 3rd or 4th choice) that
represents both CO line group and modified
digits table.
Does the
CO line have
access?
YES
NO
STOP.
Call not
completed.
YES
NO
System selects a CO line and dials number.
Call
not
completed.
CALL COMPLETED
FIGURE 2-1—LCR OPERATIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM
2-30
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
Sheets, gives more detailed explanations and
examples of how the conditions relate to the programming process.
The instructions are intended to give a concise,
general definition of LCR characteristics defined
by each record sheet.
6.22 If a station has direct CO appearances, or
pooled CO line buttons programmed to allow direct
outgoing line access, LCR will be bypassed using
the pooled line or a CO line button.
NOTES:
1. On each record sheet, enter required data
in the space provided to make a selection,
unless otherwise specified.
2. The initialized state and considerations
are documented on the record sheet.
6.23 LCR accommodates special code dialing,
such as 911 for emergency response, 1-411 or
411 for information, or 800 area code toll-free
numbers. These calls can be directed to the local
call route (see Program 50-31 ~ 35).
7.10 LCR CO Line Programming Reference
Table
7.11 This table is intended for reference only.
Information relevant to LCR is compiled here from
Basic System Programming.
IMPORTANTNOTE!
Always provide emergency service accessfornumberssuchas911.
1) Under the column labeled “CO Lines in Group
(01 ~ 36),” enter the numbers of the CO lines
assigned to groups 81 ~ 88. Refer to the completed record sheet in Program 16 for this
information.
6.24 Basic System Record programs related to
LCR include:
• Program 16 defines which outgoing CO lines
are assigned to CO line groups 81 ~ 88.
• Program 40 denies a station complete CO line
access. This also applies to LCR.
• Program 41 restricts outgoing CO line calls to
selected stations. These stations may make
outgoing calls through LCR. In this Program,
Release 1 software denies ABR; Release 2
and above software allows ABR.
2) Under the column labeled “CO Line Type/Comments,” enter the service type, the common
carrier name, or the line type for each line
group, e.g., local line, Foreign Exchange (FX)
to 818 (LA), WATS (out of state), etc.
3) Refer to Basic System Record, Program 40, to
restrict stations from incoming and outgoing
access of CO lines, including using LCR. All
stations that must use LCR to make outgoing
calls must NOT be restricted in this program.
These restrictions do apply to LCR.
6.25 Standard telephones that are Toll Restricted
should be required to use Least Cost Routing
(LCR) to place outgoing calls. This prevents Toll
Restriction defeat when the CRCU times out.
4) Refer to Basic System Record, Program 41, to
restrict stations from accessing outgoing CO
lines, except through LCR. All stations that
must use LCR for outgoing calls must be restricted from CO line access in this program.
7 COMPLETING THE LEAST COST
ROUTING SYSTEM RECORD
NOTE:
All stations using LCR should be ALLOWED
CO line access in Program 40, and DENIED
CO line access in Program 41.
7.20 Program 50 Series—LCR Definitions
7.21 Program 50-1—LCR Parameters: This program defines general operating parameters for
LCR software.
7.01 The following instructions explain completion of the System Record Sheets used to program
LCR. Instructions are arranged in the same order
as the Least Cost Routing System Record Sheets.
NOTE:
2-31
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• OFF: No warning tone sounds.
Mark an X in the column to indicate which
programming button LEDs should be lit. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF.
7.22 Program 50-2—LCR Home Area Code:
Enter the local area code in the spaces provided on
the record sheet. Initialized data leaves the home
area code blank.
• LCR matches the area code entered here with
the LCR route plan containing the home area
code in its Area Code Table (the home area
code is later entered into one of the eight
available LCR route plans through Program
51). Thus, LCR is informed of how to handle
local calls.
• Typically, systems are configured to have the
LCR route plan containing the home area code
as the same as the local route plan defined in
Program 50-5. This is typically programmed
by the installer to be route plan number 1,
rather than the default plan 8.
LED Button 01
• ON: LCR software is enabled system-wide.
• OFF: LCR software is disabled. None of the
LCR programming referred to by this section is
recognized. Dial 9 access assigned in Program 16 is enabled.
LED Button 02
• Not used.
LED Button 03
• ON: LCR routes long distance information
(LDI) calls over the plan number specified in
Program 50-4.
• OFF: LCR routes LDI calls using area codes
specified in route plans 1 ~8, as it would for any
other call.
7.23 Programs 50-31 ~ 35—LCR Special Codes:
Five Special Codes may be entered in spaces
provided next to 31 ~ 35. The codes may be a
maximum of four digits, and should include items
such as 911 for emergency calls, and 411 or 1-411
for local information, etc. Initialized data leaves all
codes blank.
• When any of these codes are dialed, LCR is
flagged to treat the call as follows:
§ The call will be sent over the local call route
plan specified in Program 50-5.
§ No additional digits need to be dialed. They
are not necessary. Therefore, the call is put
through immediately.
LED Button 04
• ON: Station users hear a simulated dial tone
immediately after dialing the access LCR code
(typically 9), until the first digit of the phone
number is dialed. The dial tone is simulated to
assure the user of the system’s proper operation, but it is not a functional dial tone.
• OFF: Station users hear nothing after dialing
the LCR access code until the destination rings
or issues a busy signal.
LED Button 05
• ON: The user is notified with a warning tone to
indicate that LCR has routed the call over the
least desirable route number. The most expensive route is typically programmed to be the
least desirable. A user has three choices upon
hearing the warning tone:
a) Ignore the tone, LCR places the call using
the least desirable route.
b) Hang up and try later to save money.
c) Activate the Automatic Call Back feature.
The appropriate CO line group calls the
user back when a more desirable route
number becomes available.
7.24 Program 50-4—LCR Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number: Enter the number of
the LCR route plan (1 ~ 8) over which long distance
information calls will be routed. Typically, long
distance information calls are routed over the local
call route defined in Program 50-5.
• If the long distance information plan is chosen
in Program 50-1, the call is routed as defined
by this table.
• Initialized data assigns plan 8 to be the LDI
route plan.
2-32
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
7.25 Program 50-5—LCR Local Call Plan Number: Of the eight route plans available for LCR call
processing, one must be defined as the Local Call
Plan, typically route plan 1. Enter the number of the
plan (1 ~ 8) over which local calls, operatorassisted/0+ calls, and special code calls will be
routed.
possible area codes (000 ~ 999) to LCR Plan
8. Therefore, calls made to all area codes will
be routed over route definitions defined in
Program 54 for plan 8, following the time
schedule specified by Program 53 for plan 8
(unless other assignments are made in plans 1
~ 7).
• For example, any area code entered in a
Program 51 LCR area code table for plans 1 ~
7 is subtracted from plan 8. An area code
cannot be lost. If it is subsequently deleted
from plans 1 ~ 7, LCR software automatically
adds it to plan 8.
• To fill in record sheets for plans 1 ~ 8:
§ Check the box by Area Code Table.
§ Enter the applicable area codes, three
digits per box.
7.26 Program 50-6—LCR Dial 0 (Zero) Timeout: Enter the maximum number of seconds LCR
waits for a user to dial additional digits after a 0,
before it routes the call to an operator for assistance. LCR will wait this number of seconds to
receive additional digits that will indicate charge
calls, collect calls or other 0+ calls.
• The allowed range is 04 ~ 10 seconds. Always
enter two digits. Initialized data assigns an
LCR dial zero time-out value of 06 seconds.
NOTE:
Remember that LCR matches the home area
code entered in P r o g r a mwith5the
0 LCR
-2
route plan containing the home area code in
its Area Code Table.The home area code
must be entered into one of the eight available LCR route plans through P r o g r a).m
Thus, LCR is informed of how to handle local
calls.Typically, systems are configured to have
the LCR route plan containing the home area
code as the same as the local route plan
defined in P r o g r a m. This
5 0usually
-5
is
programmed by the installer to be route plan
number 1, rather than the default plan 8.
7.30 Route Plan Overview
7.31 Four groups of programs define eight separate LCR route plans. They are Programs 51 ~ 54.
The purpose of the plan scheme is to provide the
system with directions for routing all possible calls,
made by all possible users at all possible times of
day. Eight separate plans provide the customer
flexibility enough to route different area codes and
exception office codes over different CO line groups.
7.32 Initialized data assigns all calls to plan eight.
Any assignments made in Programs 51 ~ 54 for
plans 1 ~ 7 will exempt the defined call from being
made on route plan 8. Likewise, any phone number not specified in routes 1 ~ 7 automatically
defaults to route plan 8.
7.35 Program 52—LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Code: The purpose of
the Office Code Exception Table is to enable the
customer the flexibility of routing specific office
codes through a different call plan than other office
codes used with that area code.
• Eight LCR office code exception tables may be
defined for the overall LCR scheme. Any number of exception code tables may be assigned
to each route plan, although each exception
table may only be used once system-wide.
• Every route plan can be assigned to define a
set of area codes and office code exceptions or
a set of office code exceptions.
• This program applies to both examples listed
below. In the first case, an office code exception table does not need to be defined in
addition to the area codes in Program 51, but
7.33 Tables for Programs 51 ~ 54 appear on LCR
Route Plan Numbers 1 ~ 8. The following instructions reveal how to fill in individual tables within the
plans. Each of the following program tables must
be completed for all plans.
7.34 Program 51—LCR Area Code Tables: Every route plan can be assigned to define a set of
area codes and/or office codes.
• The purpose of Program 51 is to define which
area code calls are placed over which LCR
Plan Number (1 ~ 8). Initialized data assigns all
2-33
5 1
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
it may. In the second case, the plan may only
pertain to exception office codes for certain
area codes.
feature—In most cases, an installation will not
require use of the time schedule feature. To reflect
this on the record sheets for plans 1 ~ 8:
Example 1—In the first example, office code exception tables will be defined to the area code
table. Use the continuation sheet to define the
exception office codes. As many as eight of the
office code exception tables may be linked to a
plan, but each exception table may only be used
once. When using the continuation sheet, be
sure that the same exception table is not assigned to more than one plan.
• Turn to the continuation sheet (that follows
plan 8 record sheet).
• Determine the plan number where the exception office codes will be rooted.
• Fill in the area code of the exception office
codes in the spaces provided by the correct plan number. These office codes will
be routed differently than the overall area
code.
• Enter the specific office codes that are to
be routed differently.
1: Enter the same Schedule Start Times for
Schedules 1 and 2. Use military time, in the
format HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). Fill in all four
digits. Initialized data assigns “0000” to all times.
• If LCR software sees schedules 1 and 2
have the same start times, then it only
looks at schedule 1 for route definitions.
2: Enter Route Definition Numbers for Schedules 1 and 2. Four definitions may be entered
for each group.
• LCR Station (Class) Groups 1 ~ 4 are
assigned in Program 56.
• LCR Route Definition numbers 1~ 4 are
defined in Program 54.
• The order in which the route definitions are
entered defines the order of LCR line selection. The most desirable route should
be entered in the leftmost position, and the
least desirable route in the rightmost position.
• If “1” is assigned to Station Group 1, and 1
for route definition only, then those assigned will only be able to use route definition 1, thereby restricting them during times
that route definition 1 is not allowed.
• Keep in mind that the route definition number is being entered, not the CO line group
number. The definitions are assigned in
Program 54.
Example 2—In the second example, the route
plan only applies to office code exceptions. The
first office code exception table may be documented on the LCR Plan record sheet:
• Check the box on the record sheet next to
Office Code Exception Table number.
• Enter the number of the exception table
(1 ~ 8). Make sure this table number is not
entered on any other plan, or on the continuation sheet.
• Enter the applicable area code.
• Enter the specific office codes that are to
be routed differently than the area code.
Installation requiring time scheduling feature—
When an installation requires the time scheduling
feature to be programmed, three “shifts” of route
definitions can be assigned per station group. To
reflect this on the record sheet, substitute step 1 of
the procedure described for the typical customer
with the following:
1: Enter the Schedule Start Times for Schedules 1, 2 and 3. Use military time, in the format
HH:MM (Hours:Minutes). Fill in all four digits.
Initialized data assigns “0000” to all times.
• Start time for schedule 2 is the stop time for
schedule 1.
• Start time for schedule 3 is the stop time for
7.36 Program 53—LCR Schedule Assign—
ments: This program assigns up to three time
schedules to each plan. Each time schedule consists of four different route definition choices (defined in Program 54) available to the four station
groups (defined in Program 56). It may be helpful
to complete Program 54 portions of the plans and
Program 56 before proceeding.
Typical Installation without time scheduling
2-34
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
schedule 2.
route, so the user doesn’t need to know.
• Start time for schedule 1 is the stop time for
schedule 3.
7.43 Program 55-0—LCR Modified Digits-Delete: Enter the Quantity of Digits that should be
deleted from the front of the number dialed for each
of the six Table Numbers in the Delete Digits
Table. The maximum number is ten. Always make
the entry two digits.
7.37 Program 54—LCR Route Definition: The
purpose of this program is to define four different
ways of routing calls for each of the eight LCR
plans. Define each route by selecting and entering:
1: CO Line Group (1 ~ 8): Refer to the LCR CO
Line Programming Reference Table completed
at the beginning of the LCR record sheets.
• Each CO line group represents a type of
service, e.g., special common carrier, foreign exchange, local line group, etc.
• Program 16 assigns CO lines to CO line
groups 1 ~ 8 (81 ~ 88).
• Program 40 denies incoming and outgoing CO line access to stations, including
LCR access.
• Program 41 allows CO line access to
stations using LCR only for outgoing calls
when enabled.
7.44 Program 55-1—LCR Modified Digits-Add
to Front of Dialed Number: Enter the digits that
must be added to the front of the number dialed in
the Add Digits Table. The maximum quantity of
digits is 22, including pauses.
• Length of pause can be indicated by using
codes (P1 ~ P8) specified in the Pause Entry
Reference Table. Each pause takes two digits
of memory space.
• Try to allow for the longest wait, e.g., make the
pause longer, rather than shorter, to accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to
access the service tones, etc.
7.45 Program 55-2—LCR Modified Digits-Add
to End of Dialed Number: Enter the digits that
must be added to the end of the number dialed in
the Add Digits Table. The maximum quantity of
digits is 22, including pauses.
• Length of pause can be indicated by using
codes (P1 ~ P8) specified in the Pause Entry
Reference Table. Each pause takes two digits
of memory space.
• Try to allow for the longest wait, e.g., make the
pause longer, rather than shorter, to accommodate the length of time a carrier may need to
access the service tones, etc.
2: Modified Digits Table (1 ~ 6): Refer to Programs 55-0, 55-1 and 55-2. The system handles
CO line groups differently, according to which
modified digits table was assigned in Program
54.
7.40 Program 55 Series—LCR Modified Digits
Tables
7.41 This program defines six modified digits tables
for LCR call handling. Each modified digits table
assigns editing steps that include:
• Deleting a pre-defined quantity of digits from
the front of the number dialed (Program 55-0).
• Adding a pre-defined number to the front of the
number dialed (Program 55-1).
• Adding a pre-defined number to the end of the
number dialed (Program 55-2).
7.46 Program 56—LCR Station Group Assignment: The purpose of this program is to assign all
defined station ports to one of four LCR Station
Groups.
• Station groups are completely independent of
one another. Therefore, each station group
must be defined separately.
• Software does not automatically assign the
highest, all-inclusive routing priority to class 1
stations, making all routes available to class 2,
3 and 4 stations available to class 1 as well.
7.42 The purpose of this program is to define call
handling so the route definition used by LCR is
invisible to the station user. The station user handles
all calls the same way. The goal is for LCR to
remember the dialing peculiarities of each call
2-35
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
• Instead, stations are assigned to independent
groups (partitioned). Completely flexible assignment of routing definitions to groups is
allowed, with no one group’s definition affecting another’s. Each group’s route definitions
are specified to activate separately according
to the time schedules set by Program 53.
1: Enter the station group number next to the port
number.
2-36
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 1, 2, 3, and 4
SYSTEM RECORD SHEETS
2-37
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
IMPORTANT INITIAL INSTALLATION NOTES:
These minimum installation steps must be carried out for proper system operation.
1. Set PCTU or PCTUS jumper plug for BATTERY OPERATION; otherwise, all programmed
customer data will be lost on power down.
2. Place PEPU, PIOU, or PIOUS PCB in highest slot number of KSU.
3. Place all other PCBs in KSU from lowest slot number to highest in the following order:
PCTU or PCTUS (always Slot 00)
PEKU or PDKU (starting at Slot 01)
PESU
PSTU
PCOU
PEMU
4. Run Program 90. Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97, and turn power OFF for five seconds, then
turn power back ON.
5. Run Program 92.
6. Enter the hardware configuration with Program 03, exit the programming mode, and turn
power OFF for five seconds, then turn power back ON.
WHEN LATER ADDING KSU PCBs:
1. Move PEMU PCBs to a higher slot number to create empty slots for additions.
2. Install new PCBs and reprogram with Program 03 (turn power OFF for five seconds, then
turn back ON). Change PEMU station and CO line numbers or reassign stations.
3. Program new features, options, etc. created by new additions.
2-38
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
STRATA DK SOFTWARE RELEASES
Software Guide: This reference guide provides updated information regarding software enhancements to the
STRATA Digital Key (DK) System.
DK Software Identification: The DK operating software is stored on Read Only Memory (ROM) chips and is identified
by ROM Version.
A DK ROM set consist of either two or four ROM chips, which are installed on the common control (PCTU) PCB. There
are five PCTU versions: PCTU4 is the Release 4 version; PCTU3, the Release 3 version; PCTU2, the Release 2
version; PCTUS1, the Release 2 version for DK24 only; and PCTU1 is the first released version. PCTU1 can be
upgraded to PCTU2 by changing ROMs supplied in the Toshiba PURR2 upgrade kit. All other PCTU ROMs cannot
be interchanged.
The ROM version may be displayed by running Program 00-0 from the local programming telephone or remote
programming terminal. The ROM version is also printed on the label attached to each of the four ROM chips in a set.
The last two or three characters on the label (e.g., 1E, 7AJ) identify the ROM version, as shown below:
ROM LABEL,
PCTU (1 and 2) TYPE
PCA
ROM LABEL, PCTUS1 TYPE
•
PCD
ROM LABEL, PCTU (3) TYPE
•
PCM
ROM LABEL, PCTU (4) TYPE
•
PCP
•
IDENTIFIES
ROM VERSION
IDENTIFIES
ROM VERSION
IDENTIFIES
ROM VERSION
IDENTIFIES
ROM VERSION
IDENTIFIES PCTU
IC SOCKET THAT
HOLDS ROM:
9 = IC9
0 = IC10
3 = IC13
4 = IC14
IDENTIFIES PCTU
IC SOCKET THAT
HOLDS ROM:
9 = IC9
0 = IC10
4 = IC14
5 = IC15
IDENTIFIES PCTU
IC SOCKET THAT
HOLDS ROM:
9 = IC9
0 = IC10
3 = IC13
4 = IC14
IDENTIFIES PCTU
IC SOCKET THAT
HOLDS ROM:
3 = IC13
4 = IC14
INDICATES THAT ROM
IS FOR PCTU (1 or 2)
INDICATES THAT ROM
IS FOR PCTUS1
INDICATES THAT ROM
IS FOR PCTU3
INDICATES THAT ROM
IS FOR PCTU4
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Only PCTU1 and PCTU2 ROMs are interchangeable with each other.
System Record Sheets: The same System Record Sheets are used for the STRATA DK24, DK56, and DK96 models
and are updated with each DK software release. Each updated and new record sheet will be dated when released and
may be inserted in the original document to replace the outdated record sheet (the record sheets released with the
original PCTU1 PCA2K software are dated June 1989).
On the record sheets, the letters “R2” note options available with Release 2 and higher only. The letters "R3" note
options available with Release 3 and higher only. The letters “R4" notes options available with Release 4 only.
See the Release 2, 3, and 4 Software Guides that follow.
2-39
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 2 (R2) SOFTWARE GUIDE
With the exception of Busy and Group Station LCD Messaging, all items available with R1 software are
available with R2 software; items listed below are available with R2 software and above only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
PESU PCB
03, Code 25 and 26
Station PCB, supports 2 standard
telephones, 4 electronic telephones
BGM/MOH separation
10-2, Button/LED 09
Separates music-on-hold and background
music; 2 music sources required
HDCB, door lock option
39, Code 72, 73, 74, 75
Allows HDCB, port B, to be optioned as a
77-2, Button/LED 4, 8, 12, 16 door lock control; 4 maximum
Release key
39, Code 76
Provides more efficient way of releasing
calls (headset or handset)
SMDR, print toll only
60-5, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Allows system SMDR to send SMDR data
for long distance calls only
Pickup code to selectively pickup
CO lines on-hold
None
Provides the call park/page for
pickup function for outside call
DISA – same as DISC but allows
access to outgoing CO line
60-6 = security code
Port 99 = COS class
78 assigns DISA CO lines
DISA code must be entered to call out on
CO lines via DISA (optional).
4-minute disconnect timer (reset-dial "0").
DISA security code change from
station
30, Button/LED 10
Allows stations designated in programming
to change the DISA code
Call forward busy, no answer,
busy/no answer
39 Codes: 57 = BNA/604
58 = NA/603
59 = BSY/602
Calls forward if station is busy, does not
answer, or busy/no answer
FIXED call forward displays on
LCD
36
LCD displays that phone has fixed call
forward set
2 CO line conference with standard
telephone
10-1 and 15-5
Allows a standard telephone to set up a
conference with 2 CO lines
Distinctive ringing for CO/Int to
standard telephone
10-2, Button/LED 07 on
Standard telephone ringing pattern is
different between intercom and CO line call
“NAME” display on LCD
None
Called LCD displays name/number
of calling station
Auto-preference and pooled line
seizure operate like STRATA e
None
Changes off-hook and pooled line
operation to allow fast release/seize
DSS transfers call when answering
another call–like STRATA e
None
CO lines ring transfer automatically when
pressing another CO line key
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-40
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 2 (R2) SOFTWARE GUIDE (continued)
With the exception of Busy and Group Station LCD Messaging, all items available with R1 software are
available with R2 software; items listed below are available with R2 software and above only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
80/160 DTMF option for VM ID
Codes
10-2
Allows Voice Mail auto digits to be sent at 80
or 160 ms
Immediate drop when Toll
Restricted digits are recognized
None
Call drops as soon as a restricted number
sequence is detected
CO line, incoming ring detector
time change: (120/223 ms)
10-1, Button/LED18
Changes CO ringing detect time to
eliminate false ring-ins from some COs
ABR overrides Program 41
None
Allows ABR to function with all LCR
program configurations
Change RM prompt from DKTS
Version 1.0 to DK Connect
None
Changes Remote Maintenance prompt
to verify that IMDU connection is made
Message waiting cancel from
voice mail port only by:
Dial 64 and station number
10-2, Button/LED 4
Deletes auto-cancel of MW LED when VM
answers a call from a station that has
MW LED from voice mail
Operation change when sending
"D" tone to VM
None
Prevents disconnects when VM device
does not recognize "D" tone to drop
connection
Ring detect time option
10-1, Button/LED 18
Ring detect time INITIALIZES TO NORMAL
to eliminate CO line false rings
Two-CO line via access
code or LCR
None
Allows two-CO line conference to be set up
from telephones via LCR and access codes.
Stations must remain in the conference.
DTMF tone return
¥ Manual dialing
¥ Voice mail I.D. auto digits
(dial codes 656 and 657)
¥ Speed dialing
10-2, Button/LED 11
Deletes DTMF tone returned to electronic
telephones when manual dialing and
speed dialing; deletes DTMF tones from
callers when the called station forwards
the call to voice mail. DTMF digits are still
sent out to CO line and voice mail ports.
Call forward backup memory
92-9, Button/LED 03
and 04
Clears call forward backup memory when
system is first initialized
Call forward memory save
None
Station call forward information is retained
during system power down; when power is
returned, stations will forward as before
power loss.
CO line reseize guard time option
Allows CO line reseize guard time to be
10-1, Button/LED 02
42-0, Button/LED 01 ~ 36 changed from 0.45 seconds to 1.5 seconds
to meet central office and CENTREX seize/
hookflash timing requirements
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-41
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 3 (R3) SOFTWARE GUIDE
All items available with R1 and R2 software are available with R3 software; items listed
below are available with R3 and higher software only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
Night ringing over selected
page zones
77-1, Button/LEDs 10 ~ 13 Allows CO lines to ring over selected PIOU
78, 1 ~ 3
page zones. CO lines can be placed into
two groups (tenant 1 and tenant 2), and
each group can be assigned to night ring
over different PIOU paging zones.
Digital telephone volume level
initialization
92-5, Buttons/LEDs 01
and 05
Digital telephone handset receive
volume level set for individual
telephones
30, Buttons/LEDs12 and 13 Allows the initial off-hook volume level to
Initialize data is Level 3.
be set individually for each digital telephone. The setable range is from level 2 to
5 (5 = loudest). The digital telephone can
be manually adjusted using the volume
control for each call over the full range of 1
to 9.
Privacy button
39, Code 53
Allows non-private stations to deny privacyoverride to other stations when privacy
button is activated. This prevents overrride
calls by pressing common CO line button
appearances.
Busy and group station LCD station
messaging which is available in R1,
but not R2, is available in R3
None
Busy station messaging:
Allows an LCD message to be sent (live)
to a busy LCD station.
Group station messaging:
Allows an LCD station to set a "called or
calling station message" for another
station or a group of stations.
"0+" credit card calls that bypass
toll restriction but do not allow
operator placed calls
43 and 60-7
Selected stations can be configured in
programming to be allowed "0+" dialing
which will override toll restriction on
selected CO lines or all CO lines. If a
station does not dial a programmable
number of digits after dialing "0", the call
will be disconnected after 10 seconds.
Data Interface Station Hunting
22
Allows data calls to busy data stations to
hunt to an idle data station. This program is
separate from voice call hunting, Program
33. Voice and data calls to the same
station can hunt to different stations.
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-42
Sets digital telephone volume levels to
their initialized settings: ring, busy override,
Intercom (muted) ring, speaker, and BGM.
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 3 (R3) SOFTWARE GUIDE (continued)
All items available with R1 and R2 software are available with R3 software;
items listed below are available with R3 and higher software only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
PDKU PCB
03, Code 62 and 64
Station PCB, supports eight Toshiba
digital telephones (DKT) or seven DKTs
and one DDSS console. Also supports up
to seven stand-alone Data Interface Units
(PDIU-DS) and DKT Integrated Data
Interface Units (PDIU-DI).
Bell Precise Busy Tone cadence is
sent from STRATA DK to outside
callers that dial busy numbers
when calling into DK on TIE, DISC,
or DISA CO lines
10-2, Button/LED 05
Allows STRATA DK busy tone cadence to
be changed from 0.25 seconds on/off
to 0.5 seconds on/off. For busy TIE line
or DISC/DISA calls.
Automatic release of Voice Mail
ports when outside caller hangs up
15, Code 0
Selected CO lines will detect the Automatic
Release (AR) signal (calling party control)
if sent from the CO line when the calling
party hangs-up on a voice mail call. This
prompts "D" tone to be sent to the PSTU
or PESU voice mail port causing the voice
mail machine to release. AR can be
detected between voice mail answer and
hookflash to transfer.
Verifiable account codes
70
30, Button/LED 14
69, 60-4, 15-7
Verified Account Code with Toll Restriction
class assignments. Up to 300 verifiable
account codes (4 ~ 15 digits) can be
set in system programming.
Voice mail (VM) to VM call blocking
31, Button/LED 4
Prevents VM ports from call forwarding or
hunting to other VM ports during screened
or supervised VM transfers.
Switched Data:
• Simultaneous voice/data over a
single wire pair via DKT with an
integrated data interface unit
(PDIU-DI)
• Modem pooling and printer sharing
using a stand-alone data interface
unit (PDIU-DS)
• Data security group 1 ~ 4
20, Buttons/LEDs 01 ~ 05
39,
DATA button, Code 56
DRLS button, Code 54
MODEM button, Code 55
21, 22
Allows digital telephones with DIUs
connected to personal computers to make
data calls internal to other DKT/DIUs with
PC for file transfers, etc. Allows DKTs with
DIUs to make external data calls over the
public telephone network automatically
via modems connected to stand-alone DIUs
specially programmed to auto-connect in
customer configuration programming.
20, Buttons/LEDs 17 ~ 20
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-43
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 3 (R3) SOFTWARE GUIDE (continued)
All items available with R1 and R2 software are available with R3 software; items listed
below are available with R3 and higher software only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
Emergency number override of
verified/forced account code
44A (51 ~ 53)
Allows up to three emergency numbers
(911, etc.) to be programmed to bypass
the forced (verified or nonverified) account
code dialing requirement.
Traveling class of service
44B (1 ~ 4)
This feature allows a toll restriction
override code to be assigned to each
station class (class 1 ~ 4). When the toll
restriction override code is dialed from a
telephone, the telephone will assume the
class the code is assigned to until the call is
complete. The telephone will return to its
normal class when the call is complete.
Account Code button
39, Code 50
Flexible button, allows voluntary account
codes to be entered anytime without
interrupting existing conversations.
Amplified Conference
(External)
10-1, Buttons/LEDs 01 ~ 04
10-2, Buttons/LEDs
18 and 19
10-3
Allows up to four customer-supplied
amplifiers to be connected to selected
system PEKU ports. The amplifiers
automatically switch into two CO line
(Tandem) and two CO line/station
conference calls. The amplifiers increase
the transmission volume level that is
typically degraded because of added
telephone network losses during two CO
line calls. Two line DISA and TIE line
calls are also amplified.
Flexible BGM connection
19, 10-3
Allows alternate BGM source and
external page output connection to any
slot with a PEKU or PESU installed.
Block Secretary Call Forward
to Voice Mail (VM) Ports
31, Button/LED 17
A calling VM port will not ring stations
that are set to Call Forward back to the
calling VM port. The calling ports will
receive busy tone, instead. The called
station will ring with Releases 1 and 2.
Enhanced Toll Restriction Dialing
Plans for Interchangeable O/C and
A/C areas
45-1
Allows interchangeable O/Cs and A/Cs
to be programmed for Toll Restriction
and LCR in the few areas that use the
1+NNX dialing plan.
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-44
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 4 (R4) SOFTWARE GUIDE
All items available with R1 and R2 and R3 software are available with R4 software;
items listed below are available with R4 and higher software only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
Door Phone Ring Number
Option
77-2/LED 20
Door phones can ring telephones once or
five times with Release 4.
Softkey Feature Prompting
None for basic operation
(10-2, Button/LED 17, for
Immediate "TRNS"
Softkey option)
Any digital telephone with an LCD can use
this feature. During calls, feature prompts
will appear on the LCD directly above
each of the three keys labelled MODE,
SCROLL, and PAGE. Users can press
these keys to access a variety of useful
features, such as Conferencing, Transfer,
Automatic Call Back, and more.
Automatic Hold
35 Button/LED 18
With this feature station users on a call on a
CO line or intercom button can answer
another call and place the existing call on
hold without having to press the HOLD
button.
Call Forward/No Answer Option
with Handsfree Answerback
35 Buttons/LED 16
Call Forward/No Answer can be eliminated
on Handsfree Answerback calls.
Busy Station Transfer/
Busy Station Ringing
35 Buttons/LEDs
20 and 19
Transferred calls will always be sent to busy
stations and have distinctive LED and tone
indications when Busy Station Transfer and
Busy Station Ringing are programmed.
User Programmable
Feature Buttons
None
Digital and electronic telephone users can
now store feature access code sequences,
as well as telephone numbers, on their
Speed Dial buttons.
DDCB
(Digital Door Phone/Lock
Control Unit)
77-1, Button/LEDs 16 ~ 20
77-2
Digital telephone circuits associated with
Ports 04, 12, 20, and 28 can support door
phones and door lock control with tthe
DDCB, which has the same fit/form/function
as the HDCB.
SMDR Threshold Time
60-2
SMDR can now be set to begin registering
at either 1 second or at 10 seconds.
PSTU Background Music
Source Connection
10-2, Buttons/Leds
9 and 10
19
The Background Music Source can now be
connected to the PSTU. (Isolation transformer may be required.)
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-45
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
RELEASE 4 (R4) SOFTWARE GUIDE (continued)
All items available with R1 and R2 and R3 software are available with R4 software;
items listed below are available with R4 and higher software only.
Item Description
*Related Programs
Comments
Speed Dial Entry Timeout
10-3 Button/LED 19
A 1 or 3 minute timeout can be set for
for storing Speed Dial numbers.
Voice Mail Port Release
Enhancement
15-0
If an outside caller hangs up during a voice
mail/auto attendant hookflash and dial
operation, STRATA DK will sent D Tone to
disconnect the voice mail/auto attendant
port. A "*" will follow the CO line number on
the SMDR report whenever a CO line call is
disconnected by an Automatic Release
signal from the Central Office.
15-0
If an outside caller hangs up while talking
to a STRATA DK station, the station will
receive busy tone and the LCD will
display, "CO LINE HANG UP". With
earlier software releases, the LCD
displays, "BUSY". A "*" will follow the CO
line number on the SMDR report whenver
a CO line call is disconnected by an
Automatic Release signal from the Central
Office.
Extended Automatic Busy Redial
Busy Tone Detection Time
None
When using Automatic Busy Redial, after
dialing, the system will wait for 30 seconds
to detect busy tone before alerting the
station that the called number is not busy.
The system waits 20 seconds with earlier
releases.
LCD Password Security with Voice
Mail Dialing
None
Digits will not appear on the LCD when
station users dial digits (identification codes)
while connected to a voice mail port.
PDIU-DS Modem Disconnect
Enhancement
20, Button LED 06
The PDIU-DS DTR lead will pulse one
second to prompt a modem to disconnect a
CO line when a user presses the Data
Release (DRLS) button on an outgoing data
call.
PDIU-DS Auto Timeout
None
The PDIU-DS will always release
automatically if it does not receive data for
nine minutes. With Release 3, LED 02 in
Program 20 had to be ON for it to release
automatically.
Voluntary Account Code Entry
Assurance
None
If an external party hangs up after a station
user presses the Account Code button to
enter a Voluntary Account Code, the system
will still register the code. The code will not
be registered with earlier releases.
NOTE:
Central Office must send Automatic
Release signal for this feature to
work.
CO Line Hang Up LCD Display
and SMDR Printout
NOTE:
Central Office must send Automatic
Release signal for this feature to
work.
*All program numbers are underlined in this column.
2-46
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM NUMBER INDEX
FEATURE OR TOPIC
PROGRAM NO. FEATURE OR TOPIC
Account Codes
70, 39, 69,15, 30, 60
Alarm Sensor
39
All Call Voice Page
05, 10-2, 31, 39
Alternate Point Answer
10-1
Amplified Conference (External)
10-2, 10-3
Automatic Busy Redial
10-1, 16, 30, 39
Automatic Callback
05, 39, 10-2
Automatic Hold
35
Automatic Hold Recall
34
Automatic Preference
32
Automatic Release Hold/VM Port
15
Background Music
05, 10-2, 19, 39
Busy Override
05
Busy Station Transfer/Ringing
35
Busy Tone Cadence Change
10-2
Call Blocking (VM Ports)
31
Call Forwarding (all types)
10-2, 36, 39
Call Forward Blocking with Handsfree
35
Call Pickup
10-1, 15, 39
Call Transfer with Camp-on
10-1
Camp-on
10-1, 37
Centrex/PBX Compatible
42-0, 42-1 ~ 8
Centrex Ringing Repeat
10-1
CO/Centrex/PBX Feature Buttons 39, 42-0, 42-1 ~ 8
CO Line Access
39, 40, 41
CO Line Alpha Identification
93
CO Line Groups
16
CO Line Reseize Guard Time
10-1, 42-0
CO Line Queuing
05, 16
CO Line Ringing
78, 81 ~ 89
Conferencing
10-1, 15
Credit Card Calls (0 + dialing)
43, 60-7
Data Port/DIU Configuration
20, 21, 22, 39
DAY/NIGHT Mode
10-2, 78, 81 ~ 89
Delayed Ringing
82, 83, 85, 86, 88, 89
Digital Telephone
03, 30, 38, 92-5
Direct Inward Station Calling (DISC)
78
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 15, 10-1, 60, 78
Direct Station Selection Buttons
29-1 ~ 29-4, 39
DISA Code Revision
30
Distinctive Station Ringing
10-2, 80
PROGRAM NO.
Do Not Disturb
05, 39
Do Not Disturb Override
05, 30
Door Lock Control
39, 77-1, 77-2
Door Phones
05, 77-1, 77-2, 79
DSS Console Features
03, 28, 29-1 ~ 29-4, 10-2
DSS DKT/EKT
39
DTMF and Dial Pulse Assignments 10-1, 15, 30, 39
DTMF Receiver (CRCU) Operation
03, 12, 15
DTMF Signal Time, CO lines (80/160 ms)
10-1
DTMF Signal Time, VM Ports (80/160 ms)
10-2
DTMF Tone Return
10-2
Emergency Numbers
44A
Exclusive Hold
10-1
Executive Override
05, 10-2, 30
External Page Interface
10-2, 77-1, 78
External Zone Paging
05, 77-1
Fixed Call Forwarding
36, 39
Flash Timing
12
Flexible Access Code Numbering
05
Flexible Button Assignments
38, 39
Flexible Intercom Numbering
04, 05, 39
Flexible Line Ringing Assignment
81 ~ 89
Flexible PCB Slot Configuration
03
Forced and Voluntary Account Codes 15, 30, 60, 39
Group Paging
05, 31
Handsfree Answerback
17, 31
Hold/Park Recall Timing
34
Immediate Transfer with Soft Key
10-2
Initialization (system programs)
90
Initialization (system/personal memory)
92
Intercom Access
39
Least Cost Routing
50 ~ 56
Liquid Crystal Display Features
10-2, 35, 39
Message Center
13
Message Waiting/Flash
12, 35, 39
Microphone Control
30, 39
Modem Pool Port Assignment
21
Music-on-Hold
77-1
Night Pickup Code
05
Night Ringing over External Page
15, 77-1, 78
Night Transfer
29, 39, 77-1, 78
2-47
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM NUMBER INDEX (continued)
FEATURE OR TOPIC
PROGRAM NO. FEATURE OR TOPIC
Off-hook Call Announce
On-hook Dialing
Outgoing Call Restriction
Paging-DKT/EKT
Passwords-Remote Programming
Pause Timing
PBX Access Code
PBX Backup
Pooled CO Lines
Pooled Line Buttons
Port/Station Number Assignment
Privacy/Non-Privacy
Privacy Override
Private CO Lines
Redial Last Number
Relay Service
Remote Administration
and Maintenance
Repeat Last Number Dialed
Ringing Line Preference
Saved Number Redial
Security Code (DISA)
Security Code (R. Maintenance)
03, 30, 31
32
41
31, 39
00
12, 39
42-1 ~ 42-8
42-0
16, 39
16, 39
04
31, 30, 39
10-2, 30, 31
39
39
77-1
00, 77-1, 78
30, 39
32, 81 ~ 89
39
30, 60
00
PROGRAM NO.
Slot Assignment
03
Speakerphone Assignment
30
Speed Dial
10-1, 30, 39
Speed Dial Clear
92
Speed Dial Entry Timeout
10-3
Standard Telephone Ringing Options
10-2
Station Class of Service
30, 31, 35
Station Hunting (Data Calls)
22
Station Hunting (Voice Calls)
33
Station Message Detail Recording
60, 97
Tandem CO Line Connections
10-1, 15
Tenant Service
15, 39
TIE Lines
03, 17
Toll Restriction
10, 30, 41 ~ 48
Toll Restriction Override
10-1, 30, 39
Toll Restriction Override Code Revision
30
Transfer Privacy
10-1
Traveling Class
44B
Traveling Class Code Revision
30
Verifiable Account Codes
15, 30, 60, 69, 70
Verifiable Account Codes Revision
30
Voice Mail Interface
10-2, 31, 39
Voice or Tone Signaling
05, 10-1, 10-2
Volume Reset (Digital Telephones)
92-9
Voluntary Account Codes
39
2-48
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 2-A
PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 IN NUMERICAL ORDER WITH SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED
Program
Number
00
03
04
05
10-1
10-2
10-3
12
13
15
Title
(Applicable Sections)
Program
Number
29-1
Title
(Applicable Sections)
DSS Button Assignment, DSS Console 1
(Basic System)
29-2
Flexible PCB Slot Assignments
(Basic System)
DSS Button Assignment, DSS Console 2
(Basic System)
29-3
Port/Station Number Assignment
(Basic System)
DSS Button Assignment, DSS Console 3
(Basic System)
29-4
Flexible Access Code Numbering
(Basic System)
DSS Button Assignment, DSS Console 4
(Basic System)
30
System Assignments, Part One of Two
(Basic System)
Station Class of Service
(Basic System)
31
System Assignments, Part Two of Two
(Basic System)
Station Class of Service
(Basic System)
32
Amplified Conference (External)
(Basic System)
Automatic Preference
(Basic System)
33
System Assignments – Basic Timing
(Basic System)
Station Hunting (Voice Calls)
(Basic System)
34
Defining the Message Center
(Basic System)
Hold Recall Timing
(Basic System)
35
Station Class of Service
(Basic System)
36
Fixed Call Forward
(Basic System)
37
Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time
(Basic System)
38
Electronic and Digital Telephone
Buttonstrip Type
(Basic System)
39
Flexible Buttonstrip Assignment
(Basic System)
40
Station CO Line Access
(Basic System)
41
Station Outgoing Call Restriction
(Basic System)
Software Check/Remote Password
Assignments
(Basic System)
Assigning DP/DTMF, Tenant Service to
Individual CO Lines
(Basic System)
16
Assigning CO Line Groups (Dial 9 or
81 ~ 88)
(Basic System)
17
TIE Line Page/Handsfree Answerback
(Basic System)
19
Alternate Background Music (BGM)
Source Slot Assignment
(Basic System)
20
Data Interface Unit (DIU: PDIU-DI and
PDIU-DS) Configuration
(Basic System)
21
Modem Pool Port Assignments
(Basic System)
42-0
CO Line to PBX Connection
(Basic System)
22
Station Hunting (Data Calls)
(Basic System)
42-1~8
PBX Access Code
(Basic System)
28
DSS Console/Attendant Telephone
Assignments
(Basic System)
43
0+ Credit Card Dialing Option
(Basic System)
2-49
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 2-A
PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 IN NUMERICAL ORDER WITH SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED
(continued)
Program
Number
Title
(Applicable Sections)
Program
Number
44A
Emergency Bypass of Verified Account
Codes
(Basic System)
44B
Toll Restriction Traveling Class Override
Codes
(Toll Restriction)
45-1
Toll Restriction Dial Plan
(Toll Restriction)
45-2
45-3~6
45-8~9
46-2~4
Title
(Applicable Sections)
50-31~35 Least Cost Routing Special Codes
(Least Cost Routing)
50-4
Least Cost Routing Long Distance
Information Route Plan
(Least Cost Routing)
50-5
Least Cost Routing Call Route Plan
Number
(Least Cost Routing)
Toll Restriction Disable
(Toll Restriction)
50-6
Least Cost Routing Dial Zero Timeout
(Least Cost Routing)
Equal Access/Special Common Carrier
Numbers and Authorization Code Digit
Length
(Toll Restriction)
51
Least Cost Routing Area Codes
(Least Cost Routing)
52
Toll Restriction Override Code
(Toll Restriction)
Least Cost Routing Office Code
Exceptions for Specified Area Code
(Least Cost Routing)
53
Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area
Codes Assigned by Class
(Toll Restriction)
Least Cost Routing Schedule
Assignments
(Least Cost Routing)
54
Least Cost Routing Route Definition
(Least Cost Routing)
46-6~8
Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Office
Codes Assigned by Class
(Toll Restriction)
55-0
46-10
Toll Restriction Class 1 Parameters
(Toll Restriction)
Least Cost Routing Modified Digits–
Delete
(Least Cost Routing)
55-1~2
46-20
Toll Restriction Class 2 Parameters
(Toll Restriction)
Least Cost Routing Modified Digits–Add
(Least Cost Routing)
56
46-30
Toll Restriction Class 3 Parameters
(Toll Restriction)
Least Cost Routing Station Group
Assignments
(Least Cost Routing)
46-40
Toll Restriction Class 4 Parameters
(Toll Restriction)
60
Station Message Detail Recording
Output/Account Code Digit Length
(Basic System)
47
Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes
Assigned by Area Code
(Toll Restriction)
69
Verified Account Codes
(Basic System)
48
Station Toll Restriction Classification
(Toll Restriction)
70
Verified Account Code Toll Restriction
Assignments
(Basic System)
50-1
Least Cost Routing Parameters
(Least Cost Routing)
77-1
Doorphone Selections
(Basic System)
50-2
Least Cost Routing Home Area Code
(Least Cost Routing)
77-2
Doorphone Busy Signal Assignments
(Basic System)
2-50
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 2-A
PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97 IN NUMERICAL ORDER WITH SECTIONS CROSS-REFERENCED
(continued)
Program
Number
79
80
Program
Number
Title
(Applicable Sections)
(Basic System)
Door Phone Ringing
(Basic System)
Electronic and Digital Telephone Ringing
Tones
(Basic System)
Title
(Applicable Sections)
88
NIGHT DELAY1 Ringing
(Basic System)
89
NIGHT DELAY2 Ringing
(Basic System)
90
Initializing Program 00~89
(Basic System)
92
Initializing Speed Dial Numbers, VM ID
Codes, Character Message Memory, Timed
Reminder, Digital Telephone Volume
Levels, and CO Line Identifications
(Basic System)
81
DAY IMMEDIATE Ringing
(Basic System)
82
DAY DELAY1 Ringing
(Basic System)
83
DAY DELAY2 Ringing
(Basic System)
93
CO Line Identification
(Basic System)
84
DAY2 IMMEDIATE Ringing
(Basic System)
97
85
DAY2 DELAY1 Ringing
(Basic System)
Station Message Detail Recording Data
Printout Options
(Basic System)
86
DAY2 DELAY2 Ringing
(Basic System)
87
NIGHT IMMEDIATE Ringing
(Basic System)
2-51
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
another program
more data
Spkr
*
#
*
Step 1
Enter Program Mode
A
Spkr
#
Hold
Step 2
Enter Program Number
S
Spkr
Hold
Step 3
Enter Program Data
H
S
and/or
Spkr
#
#
Hold
Step 4
Exit Current Program
H
Z
Spkr
#
#
Hold
Step 5
Exit Program Mode
Z
(LED/Button)
NOTE:
A
Varies depending upon how the
Automatic Off-hook Preference
is programmed. It can be:
* Intercom
Intercom
*
Spkr
Spkr
*
*
*
*
#
#
*
#
*
#
#
#
Normal, when port 05 is set with auto preference code 01 in Program 32
* If SpeedŒDial (SDS) and Redial (RDL)
buttons are on the programming telephone.
FIGURE 2-2–PROGRAMMING BUTTON SEQUENCE OVERVIEW
The System Record contains programming forms for Programs 00 ~ 97. A System Record should be filled
out for each system installed as detailed in Chapters 1 and 2.
Each programming form is supplemented with a guide for entering data from the form. The guide illustrates
the key sequence a programmer must press, with the exception of sequences common to all programs, e.g.,
entering programming mode (A), exiting current program (Z), and exiting programming mode (Z). To save
space, these common sequences are coded, as illustrated in Figure 2-2. The Spkr ( SPEAKER) and
Hold (HOLD) buttons are also coded "S" and "H" to save space.
NOTE:
Programs 90, 92, and 03 are out of order and placed in front purposely because they must always be
completed first, and in this order. Upon completing these steps, begin with
Program 00.
2-52
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
INITIALIZATION PROGRAM 90
INITIALIZING PROGRAMS 00 ~ 97
A
S
9
0
Enter programming mode
H
S
#
Program(s) to
be initialized
01
02
1 and 2 LEDs
must be lit
H
Z
If all programs or
only Program 32
is initialized,
POWER OFF
for 5 sec, then
POWER ON
Z
END
Program 90
1 and 2 LEDs
must flash
EXIT
programming
mode
IMPORTANT
Initialize Programs 00 ~ 97 every time :
• A new system is installed
• To bring a system's programming back to the default setting.
Specifiy the range as follows:
0
0
9 7
*
To initialize one program at a time, just enter the individual
program number, then #.
NOTES:
1. Always complete Program 90 at new system installs, before programming
anything else. Skipping this step may cause erratic system behavior.
2. Follow instructions in Table 1-C (Section 400-096-301) to clear this data.
3. When Program 90 is run, it will initialize any program or range of Programs
without cycling system power. System power may be cycled to cause Program
32 to initialize the programming station with Intercom autopreference. This
allows the programming station to enter the Programming Mode using the Spkr
(SPKR button ( A
= SPKR * # * # HOLD).
WARNING!
Running this program will erase customer data.
2-53
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
INITIALIZATION PROGRAM 92
INITIALIZING SPEED DIAL NUMBERS, ID CODES CHARACTER MESSAGE MEMORY, TIMED REMINDERS,
DIGITAL TELEPHONE VOLUME, AND CALL FORWARD BACKUP RAM
more data
A
S
9
2
H
S
H
Enter programming mode
SELECT = (as below)
Z
END
Program 92
Z
EXIT
programming
mode
1
01
03
Clears Station Speed Dial, Voice Mail ID Codes,
and LCD memos assigned to Station Speed Dial numbers.
2
01
04
Clears System Speed Dial and LCD memos assigned to
System Speed Dial numbers.
3
02
03
Clears Character Message Memory (Station and System)
and User Name/Number Display.
4
02
04
Clears Timed Reminders.
5
01
05
Resets digital telephone volume levels to initialized settings, specifically,
speaker volume levels for Intercom Tone/BGM, busy override (muted ring), and
ringing volume to approximately mid-range on all DKTs (Release 3 and higher). 4
9
03
04
H
Power OFF
5 seconds;
then Power ON
5
Clears Call Forward Memory
(all stations, Release 2 and higher).
NOTES:
1. IMPORTANT: It is mandatory to complete all parts of Program 92 at every new
system install. If Program 92 is not completed certain feature operations may cause
erratic system behavior.
2. Use the instructions in Table 1-D (Section 400-096-301) to clear this data.
3. Program 92-9 does not affect Fixed Call Forward settings.
4. Program 92-5 does not affect digital telephone handset receiver volume levels. To
set off-hook handset receiver volume levels individually for each digital telephone,
see Program 30, LEDs 12 and 13.
5. Power OFF and ON is required to clear telephone LCD Call Forward
Displays and Call Forward button LEDs. Call Forward memory is cleared when
Program 92-9 is run, even if system power is not cycled.
WARNING!
Running this program will erase customer data.
2-54
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 03
To Store Data
FLEXIBLE PCB SLOT ASSIGNMENTS
10
A
S
0
3
H
S
H
SELECT = Slot Number
See Note 6.
Z
Z
When Complete:
POWER OFF
for 5 sec., then
POWER ON
CARD = PCB Code
See Reference Table
DK24/56
SLOT NO.
5
01
00
02
03
04
05
06
07
NOTES:
DK24, Slots 00 ~ 06 only
DK56, Slots 00 ~ 08 only
PCTUS1, Ports 00 ~ 23
PCTU(2), Ports 00 ~ 95
PCTU(3), Ports 00 ~ 95
PCTU(4), Ports 00 ~ 95
08
PCB CODE
PCB TYPE
7
PCTU
PEKU
or
11
PDKU
OPTIONS
STA. PORT #s
CO/TIE LINE#s
—
00~07
—
PCB CODE
Reference Table
PCB
CODE PORTS/TYPE
DK96
(Top Shelf)
SLOT NO.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
PEKU
or
11
PDKU
OPTIONS
STA. PORT #s 00~07
CO/TIE LINE#s
DK96
(Bottom Shelf)
SLOT NO.
00
09
10
11
9
12
9
13
9
14
9
PCB CODE
PCB TYPE
91
NONE
PCTU
CRCU4
92
NONE
PCTU 7
CRCU8
93
NONE
PIOU(S)/
PEPU
41
NONE
PDKU
61
8/STA.
PDKU
w/OCA,
DIU
62
8/STA.
PDKU
w/DSS/
OCA/DIU
64
8/STA.
PEKU
21
8/STA.
PEKU
EOCU
22
8/STA.
PEKU
w/DSS
23
8/STA.
7
PCB CODE
PCB TYPE
PCTU 7
PCTU8
OPTIONS
STA. PORT #s
—
PEKU
EOCU
w/DSS
24
8/STA.
CO/TIE LINE#s
—
PESU
25
Note 6
PESU
EOCU
26
Note 6
PSTU
31
8/STA.
PCOU
11
4/CO
PEMU
13
4/CO
4/STA.
NONE
00
NONE
NOTES:
1. See Table 1-E (Section 400-096-301) to input the data from this record sheet.
2. A PCTU or PCTUS (PCB Codes 91, 92 or 93) must be installed in Slot 00 (labeled PCTU).
3. The programming station (205) must be connected to Circuit 6 of a PDKU, PEKU, or PESU
in Slot 01.
4. Initialized data reads Slot 00 = 91, Slot 01 = 21, Slots 02 ~ 14 = 00.
5. System PCB slots are labeled PCTU, S01 ~ S14. For programming, these tables label the
same slots 00 (PCTU) ~ 14.
6. PESU circuits: 1 and 2, standard telephones; 3 and 4, not used; 5 ~ 8, electronic telephones.
Total 8 station ports used in software; available with Release 2 and higher.
7. PCTU1, PCTU2, PCTU3, PCTU4 (PCTUS in DK24 only).
8. PCTU1, PCTU2, PCTU3, PCTU4 only.
9. OCA or PDIU-DI/PDIU-DS is not available with slots 11 ~ 14.
10. System Power must always be cycled after running Program 03.
11. PCTU3 or PCTU4 is required when a PDKU is installed.
2-55
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 00
SOFTWARE CHECK/REMOTE MAINTENANCE SECURITY CODE ASSIGNMENTS
A
S
0
0
H
S
H
SELECT = Select Code
Enter 0 to check software version.
Enter 1 to change 1st level password.
Enter 2 to change 2nd level password.
Enter 8 to check software sum.
Enter 9 to check counter.
Select
Code
Z
Z
Password Codes
Enter the 4-digit password.
See Note 3.
Password or S/W Check Codes
Item
0
ROM Version
=
1
1st Level Password
=
2
2nd Level Password
=
8
Software RAM Checksum
=
9
Power Cycle Counter
=
See Note 4.
See Note 5.
See Note 5.
NOTES:
1. See instructions in Table 1-F (Section 400-096-301) to program the system with this information.
2. Initialized passwords are 0000.
3. The LCD responds as follows, when a selection is made:
0 Version =
1 Password =
2 Password =
8 Sum =
9 Counter =
4. This selection is not programmable. It identifies the system's software version as follows:
PCTU4 (Release 4)
P
C
P
X
PCTU 3 (Release 3) P C M X
.
.
PCTU2 (Release 2)
D
X
PCTUS1 (Release 2) D V
PCTU1 (Release 1)
ROM Version
D
X
.
.
.
ROM Version
5. These selections are not programmable. They are for factory test purposes only. The Checksum
and Counter vary as customer data is entered.
2-56
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 04
PORT/STATION NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
A
S
0
4
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number
Slot
H
Z
Z
INT = Station Number
S01: PDKU/PEKU/PESU15 S01: PDKU/PEKU/PESU15
Port
00
INT
(Sta No.)
01
16
17
32
10
03
04
12
19
20
12
02
7
7
05
6
10
08
09
23
13
24
06
07
21
22
12
10
12
11
12
7
13
14
15
25
12
26
12
27
28
7
29
30
31
12
18
33
12
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
NOTES:
1. Follow instructions in Table 1-G (Section 400-096-301) to enter this data.
2. If a station number is assigned, and “ERROR” displays on the LCD, the station number has already been assigned to another port.
3. Station numbers default to 200 ~ 295. New station number assignments will not activate on individual station LCDs until the handset
goes on-/off-hook.
4. If an assigned station number conflicts with a default feature access code, no error message is issued. The station's LCD reflects
the conflicting number. When another station attempts to dial the number, the station will not ring. Instead, the feature activates.
5. If station numbers that conflict with feature access codes must be assigned, use Program 05 to change the access codes first.
6. The station connected to Port 05 in Slot 01 has exclusive ability to program the system, this station must be in Slot 01.
7. PDKU/PEKU Ports 04, 12, 20 and 28 can support Door Phone Control Units (DDCBs or HDCBs). See Program 77-1.
8. Door phone and modem (IMDU) station numbers are pre-assigned as follows:
• Modem = 19
IMDU modem number:
• Port 04 = 151, 152, 153; Port 12 = 154, 155, 156
Door phone numbers:
Port 20 = 157, 158, 159; Port 28 = 161, 162, 163
9. To insert a blank, press LED 01; range programming is possible.
10. PEKU Circuit 3 or PESU Circuit 8 is the optional BGM connecting port circuit. This BGM PCB must be installed in Slot 01 in Release
2, but can be in any slot with Release 3 and 4 (see Program 19). With Release 4, optional BGM can be connected to PSTU Circuit
3 or 8. DIUs cannot be connected to Circuit 8 of a PDKU1A, but can be connected to all circuits on a PDKU2A.
11. Port 99 = DISA COS port (Release 2 and higher); DISA Port 99 is normally used in Programs 30, 40, 41, and 48.
12. May be used to connect two-CO line external conference amplifier (customer-supplied) to PEKU PCB (see Program 10-3).
13. Last port available when using PCTUS1 control PCB.
14. PDKU requires Release 3 (PCTU3) and higher .
15. If a PESU is installed in Slot 01, the programming station (205) will be available, but Station 200 will have to be a standard telephone
and will not be able to set the system time and date. The PESU does not support a DSS console.
2-57
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 05
FLEXIBLE ACCESS CODE NUMBERING
A
S
0
5
H
S
H
SELECT = Access Code 1~9
from the Table Below
Access
Code
Z
Z
SPECIAL DIAL = New Access Codes
See Note 6 Below.
Features Affected (N/A = Not Affected)
0
Unused
1
Voice First/Tone First (N/A)(1)
Door Phones (151-163)
IMDU Access (19)
Station LCD Messages (10-19)
Station Speed Dial Set (10 ~ 49)
2
Busy Override (N/A) (2)
Do Not Disturb Override (N/A) (2)
Station Numbers N/A 200 ~ 295
Off-hook Call Announce (N/A) (2)
3
Executive Override (N/A) (3)
All Call Voice Page (30)
All Call Voice Page with External Spkrs (39)
External Page (35-38)
Group Page (Internal) (31-34)
4
Automatic Callback (N/A) (4)
CO Line Queuing (N/A) (4)
Station Number Display (401)
Port Number Display (402)
Hold/Park (41)
Hold/Park Pickup (42)
Automatic Busy Redial (44)
Automatic Busy Redial Cancel (44)
Message Waiting Answer (408)
Flash (45)
Account Code Input (46)
T.R. Override/T. Class Code Input (47)
BGM Over Stations ON (481)
BGM Over Stations OFF (480)
BGM Over External Speakers ON (491)
BGM Over External Speakers OFF (490)
Cancel Message Waiting at Station (No Msg,
MESSAGE, MW key) (409)
5
(R3 and higher) Voluntary Account Code (*50)
(R2 and higher) Call Pickup Station (5+Station No.), Ringing CO Line (59), Telephone Page (530)
(R2 and higher) Directed Pickup of CO Line on Hold (57
,
= 01 ~ 36), External Page
(531, 535 ~ 538)
6
Call Forward (601, R2 and higher: 602, 603, 604)
Timed Reminder (605-609)
M/W for Voice Mail ON (63+Station No.)
M/W for Voice Mail OFF (64+Station No.)
Voice Mail ID Code Set (Call Fwd, 656)
Voice Mail ID Code Set (Ans. MW, 657)
LCD Message Set (68)
(R3 and higher) DKT Mute Ring Adjust (6101)
(R3 and higher) DKT Ring Level Adjust (6102)
7
CO Outgoing Calls (701-736)
Message Waiting Set/Cancel (N/A) (7)/I (77)
8
CO Group Outgoing Calls (81 ~ 88)
9
Least Cost Routing or CO Group (9)
New
Access
Codes
Date Set (651)
Time Set (652)
Weekday Set (653)
T.R. Override Code Change (654, 655)
System Speed Dial/LCD Messages (60-99)
(R2 and higher) LCD User Name (621-Set, 620-Reset)
(R2 and higher) DISA Security Code Change (658)
(R3 and higher) Verified Account Code Change (659)
(R3 and higher) Traveling Class Code 1 ~ 4 Change
(622 ~ 625)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Be sure access code changes do not conflict with existing access code or station numbering schemes. Refer to Program 04 –
Port/Station Number Assignment.
3. To insert a blank, press programming LED/Button 01.
4. If access codes are being changed to a number that is currently assigned, change the currently assigned code to an unused code
first. In the initialized state, the only unused code is zero (0).
5. The initialized station number sequence of 200 ~ 295 may not be globally changed through Program 05. Make changes through
Program 04.
6. Access codes can be replaced by 2 digits. Standard Access codes are shown for reference.
2-58
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 10-1
SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS, PART 1 OF 2
A
S
1
0
H
S
1
SELECT = 1
Key/LED
X
Z
LED Off
2
Two CO Conference/Allowed
19
2
Conference/Allowed
2
Z
Key LEDs
Light LEDs as described
in the table below
LED On
20
(R2) 18
H
7
Not Allowed
Not Allowed
Ring Detect Time - Normal
6
Ring Detect Time – Short Rings
17
Intercom Volume PAD (-8 dB)
No Intercom PAD
16
–
–
15
–
–
14
–
–
13
–
–
12
ABR Cycles/10 times
15 times
11
ABR Redial time/30 sec.
1 min.
System Speed Dial Override,Toll Restriction
Restricted
09
2
Exclusive Hold/Allowed
Not Allowed
08
2
Alternate Point Answer
Transfer Privacy
2
Ring Transfer of CO Lines Allowed
Not Allowed
CO Repeat Ringing
Standard Ring
Incoming Call Abandon/8 sec.
6 sec.
CO DTMF Signal Time/160 msec.
80 msec.3
DP Make Ratio/33%
40%
0.45 or 1.5 sec. per Program 42-0
CO line re-seize guard time 0.45
Tone First (from DKTs and EKTs)
Voice First (DKTs from EKTs)
10
07
06
4
5
05
04
3
03
(R2) 02
01
8
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data lights LEDs 07, 08, 09, 18, 19 and 20.
3. LED 04 DTMF Signal Time applies to manual and speed dial tones sent out of the system via CO or TIE lines. This
applies when dialing from any Toshiba telephone, including the 2000-series Digital Telephone. LED 04 does not
apply to Call Forward or Voice Mail ID DTMF tones sent to voice mail ports. (See Program 10-2, LED 06, for tones
sent to Voice Mail ports.)
4. If Ring Transfer is allowed, set Ring Transfer Recall time in Program 37; if ring transfer is not allowed (LED 07 off),
the station will recall immediately if transfer is attempted.
5. Standard ring pattern is 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off.
6. Release 1 software detects short ring signals only.
7. Two CO conference must be allowed for DISA operation.
8. CO line guard time is the time interval the system requires to release a CO line and reseize it. If LED 02 is off, all
lines are set with 0.45 second guard time; if LED is on, guard time is 0.45 or 1.5 seconds per Program 42-0.
2-59
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 10-2
SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS, PART 2 OF 2
A
S
1
0
H
S
H
2
SELECT = 2
BUTTON/LED
20
X
Z
Z
Key LEDs
Light LEDs as defined by the table below.
ALL LEDs with an "X" should be lit when you finish
LED On
–
LED Off
–
19 11
Station External Amp Conference
No External Amplifier Connected
18
Two CO Line Conference
No Two CO Line Conference
“TRNS” Soft Key—Immediate
“TRNS” Soft Key—Normal
2
Executive Override Warning Tone/ON
Executive Override Warning Tone/OFF
2
External Page included with All Call Page
Not Included
2
Privacy Override Warning Tone/ON
Privacy Override Warning Tone/OFF
(R4) 17
16
15
7
14
3
13
Send Auto Callback Camp-on Tone
No Callback Tone
12
CO Line 3 min Beep Tone
No Beep Tone
8
DTMF Tone Return
No DTMF Tone Return
(R2) 11
(R2, R4) 10
4
(R2, R4) 09
4
12
10
EKT connected to PESU, CKT 8
12
10
BGM connected to PSTU /PEKU, Circuit 3
EKT connected to PEKU, CKT 3
BGM connected to PSTU /PESU, Circuit 8
Display Dialed Number/1min.
Display Dialed Number/15 sec.
(R2) 07
6
Standard Tel. CO Ring per Prog. 10-1, LED 06
Standard Tel. CO Ring Distinctive
(R2) 06
5
VM ID Code DTMF Signal Time 80 ms
160 ms
08
9
(R3) 05
TIE/DISA Busy Tone, 0.5 second cadence
TIE/DISA Busy Tone, 0.25 second cadence
(R2) 04
MW cancel from VM; dial 6 4 & Station No.
MW cancel from VM: Automatic
Ringing Modes/3
Ringing Modes/2
03
02
01
2
Hunt/C.F. override from DSS console's phone Hunt/C.F. override from DSS console
Tone First (from DSS Console)
Voice First (from DSS Console)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data lights LEDs 02, 14, 15 and 16.
3. Called party receives notification tone when calling party activates ACB.
4. BGM connected to the PSTU, PEKU, or PESU will be sent to electronic and digital telephone speakers and external page
(optional).
5. VM ID code DTMF signal time is fixed at 160 ms for Release 1 software. With Release 2 and above, DTMF tones to VM
ports can be 80 ms or 160 ms. Effective for all Toshiba telephones, including 2000-series Digital Telephones.
6. The ring pattern for standard telephone, distinctive ring on incoming CO calls is: 0.2 sec. on/0.4 sec. off, 0.2 sec. on/3.4
sec. off; intercom ring is always 1 sec. on, 3 sec. off. This does not apply to VM Ports (Program 31, LED 17 on) which are
always standard ring.
7. External speakers and all electronic and digital telephones are paged by dialing: Intercom (INT) 3 9.
The AllÍCallÍPage (A C) button is used to page all digital and electronic telephones only; external speakers are not
included when using the button.
8. Deletes DTMF tones returned to digital and electronic telephones when dialing from dialpad or speed dialing; also deletes
auto dial digits from callers that are call forwarded to voice mail. This does not affect the actual DTMF tones sent out to
the CO or voice mail.
9. 0.5 second cadence, Bell Standard Busy Tone, should be enabled so outside callers are not confused by STRATA 0.25
second busy tone when calling busy number on DISA and TIE line calls
10. PESU/PEKU must be in SLOT 01 if using Release 2 software; PESU/PEKU can be in any universal slot assigned in
Program 19-1 if using Release 3 and higher software.
11. Important: LED 19 should be OFF unless external amplifiers are used for two-CO line/station conference (see Program
10-3). If LED 19 is ON, the station may be unbalanced and receive HUM if external amplifier with Auto-Gain-Control is not
connected. It is recommended to test conference with LED 19 ON; if there is no HUM noise, Keep LED 19 ON.
12. With Release 4, the BGM can connect to PSTU Circuit 3 or 8.
2-60
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 10-3
SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS, PART 3 OF 3 (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
A
S
1
0
H
S
SELECT = 3
KEY/LED
X
H
3
Z
Z
Key LEDs
Light LEDs as defined by the table below.
ALL LEDs with an "X" should be lit when you finish.
LED ON
LED OFF
Speed Dial Entry Timeout—3 Minutes
Speed Dial Entry Timeout—1 Minute
(R3) 04
PEKU Ports 33, 34 — Amp. 4 Connected
Ports 33, 34 — Stations Connected
(R3) 03
PEKU Ports 25, 26 — Amp. 3 Connected
Ports 25, 26 — Stations Connected
(R3) 02
PEKU Ports 17, 18 — Amp. 2 Connected
Ports 17, 18 — Stations Connected
(R3) 01
PEKU Ports 09, 10 — Amp. 1 Connected
Ports 09, 10 — Stations Connected
20
(R4) 19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data: all LEDs OFF.
3. See Section 400-096-208, for connecting up to four two-way amplifiers for use on tandem, DISA, and conference
telephone calls.
4. Important: Only enable the PEKU ports that are actually connected to amplifiers.
5. Amplifiers are switched into two-CO line calls automatically, one amplifier for each call, starting from the lowest ports
enabled to the highest. Skipping ports is allowed. Two-CO line calls established after all amplifiers are in use will
not be amplified.
6. See Program 10-2, LED 18 and 19; Program 10-1, LEDs 19 and 20; and Program 15-5 for more information
regarding two-CO line conference/tandem.
2-61
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 12
SYSTEM ASSIGNMENTS - BASIC TIMING
A
S
1
2
H
S
H
SELECT = 3~9
Enter program code,
3 ~ 9, from table below.
Program Code
Function
36
Pause Timing
(Speed Dial)
46
5
9
Required
Code
1
1.5 sec.
2
3.0 sec.
1
0.5 sec.
2
2.0 sec.
(R2) 4
0.2 sec.5
Pause After Flash
(Voice Path Delay)
CRCU Inter-digital Release
Time (Standard Phone)
Z
SELECT CODE = Enter required
code for the time listed in the
table below. See Note 3.
Time
Flash Timing 4
Z
0
no pause
1
1.5 sec.
2
3 sec.
1
1 sec.
through
through
9
9 sec.
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data programs timing as follows: Code 3 = 1, Code 4 = 2, Code 5 = 0, and Code 9 =
4.
3. When programming Code 9, the LCD responds with LINE TIME = instead of SELECT CODE =.
4. The duration of time the PCOU circuit opens Tip & Ring when the Flash( FLASH)or MW/FL
button is pressed, or hookflash code Cnf/Trn (CONF/TRANS)4 5 is dialed.
5. This timing is not used in the United States.
6. This timing applies to voice calls originated from telephones and data calls originated by system
Data Interface Units.
2-62
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 13
DEFINING THE MESSAGE CENTER
A
S
1
3
H
S
1
SELECT = 1
H
Z
Z
PORT = Port Number
Enter the port number of the
station to be defined
as the Message Center.
Port
Number
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Any electronic or digital telephone may receive (and store) up to 3 message waiting indications
from any other electronic or digital telephone. A fourth message waiting indication may be set
by the Message Center electronic or digital telephone only.
3. The Message Center is allowed to perform “Message Waiting,” even if disallowed on all other
stations.
4. Initialized data = no port assigned.
5. The message center feature should be assigned to the customer's main answering position: a
station or the lowest port (in VM group) of the customer's voice mail device (see Program 31
for VM group port assignment), whichever the customer specifies.
2-63
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 15
ASSIGNING DP/DTMF, TENANT SERVICE TO INDIVIDUAL CO LINES
A
S
1
5
H
S
H
Z
SELECT = Program Code
Key LEDs = CO Line
Specify CO lines by setting LED keys, as defined by the table below.
All LEDs with an "X" should be lit when finished.
On-hook
CO Lines 01 ~ 20
(LED Keys)
LED Status
Program
Code
Program
ON
OFF
0 (R3) AR VM Calls 4
Detect
Ignore
1
CO Outgoing Signal
DP 6
DTMF
2
CO Dial Pulse Rate
(Pulse per sec.)
20 PPS
10 PPS
3
AR Hold
Recognize
Ignore
Crossbar
95 msec.
ESS (Electronic)
450 msec.
4
4
AR Timing 4
5
Tandem CO Line Connection
Equipped 5
with Station Dropout
6
CO Line Tenant Assignment
Tenant 2
Tenant 1
7
Forced Account Code
Equipped
Not Equipped
Operation After Flash
No CRCU
after flash
CRCU
after flash
8
Z
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06) (07) (08) (09) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
Not Equipped
Off-hook
CO Lines 21 ~ 36
(LED Keys)
LED Status
Program
Code
Program
ON
0 (R3) AR VM Calls 4
Detect
6
OFF
Ignore
1
CO Outgoing Signal
DP
2
CO Dial Pulse Rate
(Pulse per sec.)
20 PPS
10 PPS
3
AR Hold
Recognize
Ignore
Crossbar
95 msec.
ESS (Electronic)
450 msec.
4
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
(01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06) (07) (08) (09) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
DTMF
4
AR Timing 4
5
Tandem CO Line Connection
Equipped5
with Station Dropout
Not Equipped
6
CO Line Tenant Assignment
Tenant 2
Tenant 1
7
Forced Account Code
Equipped
Not Equipped
8
Operation After Flash
No CRCU
after flash
CRCU
after flash
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data is all LEDs OFF.
3. Shaded areas indicate that the handset must be off-hook during programming.
Program CO lines 01 through 20 with handset on-hook
Program CO lines 21 through 36 with handset off-hook
4. The Automatic Release (AR) signal is called Calling Party Control (CPC) or Supervised Loop Control. This signal consist of a momentary
open of the CO line provided by some Central Office (CO)—the duration of the open depends on the CO. If a CO line is programmed
(Programs 15-0 and 15-3) to detect the AR signal, the DK system will drop the line when the CO sends the signal (typically 1 ~ 15 seconds
after the outside party hangs up). Release 3 and 4 systems will send D Tone to voice mail (VM) ports to drop the ports when AR is detected.
The STRATA DK system will disconnect a CO line voice call anytime that the AR signal is detected and the CO line has Programs 15-0 and
15-3 enabled."CO LINE HANG UP" will display on the station's LCD when this happens. Releases 1 and 2 systems detect AR signal only
during the Hold and Transfer states, and do not send D Tone to VM ports.
5. Tandem connection must be equipped for all DISA CO lines and all other lines used for two-CO line conference.
6. Stations that must send DTMF tones over Dial Pulse CO lines must have a ToneÍDialÍSelect (TONE) button. See Program 39 for
button assignments.
2-64
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 16
ASSIGNING CO LINE GROUPS (DIAL 9 OR 81 ~ 88)
A
S
1
6
H
S
H
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = CO Line Group
Only enter the last digit of
the CO line group (1 ~ 8) to
be defined, or enter 0 for
Dial 9 group.
Key CO
LED Line
16
(36)
15
(35)
14
(34)
13
(33)
12
(32)
11
(31)
10
(30)
09
(29)
08
(28)
07
(27)
06
(26)
05
(25)
04
(24)
03
(23)
02
(22)
01
(21)
20
(20)
19
(19)
18
(18)
17
(17)
16
(16)
15
(15)
14
(14)
13
(13)
12
(12)
11
(11)
10
(10)
09
(09)
08
(08)
07
(07)
06
(06)
05
(05)
04
(04)
03
(03)
02
(02)
01
(01)
81 (1)
82 (2)
83 (3)
84 (4)
Z
Z
Key LEDs
Specify which CO lines are assigned to the
group by setting LEDs as defined by the table
below. All LEDs with an "X" should be lit when finished.
See Note 2.
CO Line Groups
85 (5)
86 (6)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Shaded areas indicate that the handset must be off-hook during programming.
Program CO lines 1~20 by setting LEDs 1~20 with the handset on-hook;
Program CO lines 21~36 by setting LEDs 1~16 with the handset off-hook;
3. Initialized data assigns all CO lines to the Dial 9 group.
2-65
87 (7)
88 (8)
Dial 9 (0)
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 17
TIE LINE PAGE/HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK
A
S
1
7
H
S
#
Select = TIE Line
Enter the number of the
CO line designated as a
TIE line (01 ~ 36).
See Notes 3 and 6.
PEMU
Slot No.
PEMU 1
PCB
Slot No.
TIE Line
Circuit
TIE Line
(CO Line)
01 ~ 36
01
H
Z
Z
Light Button/LED 01 to enable
the Page/Handsfree Answerback
Feature on the TIE line defined.
See Note 4.
Button 01
LED Lit
X = ON
1
2
3
4
PEMU 2
PCB
Slot No.
1
2
3
4
PEMU 3
PCB
Slot No.
1
2
3
4
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. System page access to external TIE line callers and handsfree answerback to stations receiving TIE line calls can
be allowed with this program.
3. Shaded areas of the table are for configuration purposes. Refer to Program 03 to find the PEMU PCB slot numbers.
Program 03 must be completed prior to this program.
4. Be sure to specify both digits of the CO line assigned as a TIE line. If the 0 before a single digit (01 ~ 09) is left out,
the LCD displays what is entered, but LED 01 cannot be programmed.
5. All 20 LEDs light if pressed, but only LED 01 has a programming function.
6. Initialized data does not assign Page/Handsfree Answerback to any TIE line. LED 01 stays off for all CO lines.
7. A range of TIE lines may be programmed by entering
*
Low port
High port
8. Maximum PEMU PCBs allowed because of power supply limits: DK24 = 1 PEMU, DK56 = 2 PEMUs, DK96 = 3
PEMUs.
9. If PEMU is installed with PCTUS PCB, only 16 station ports are available.
10. When a PEMU is installed, it is automatically assigned to the next consecutive CO line and station ports: if the system
is equipped with a PCTU (1, 2, 3, or 4) the PEMU assumes four CO lines and four station ports; with a PCTUS it
assumes four CO lines and eight station ports.
2-66
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 19
BACKGROUND MUSIC SLOT IDENTIFICATION (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
A
S
1
9
H
S
SELECT = 1
1
H
Z
Z
SLOT (01 ~ 14)
DK96: 01 ~ 14
DK56: 01 ~ 08
DK24: 01 ~ 06
Slot number of PEKU, PSTU,
or PESU connected to
background music (BGM) source
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. If PEKU, the BGM source must be wired to Circuit 3.
3. If PESU, the BGM source must be wired to Circuit 8.
4. If PSTU (Release 4), the BGM source must be wired to Circuit 3 or Circuit 8. An isolation
transformer may be required if connecting the source to a PSTU. See Section 400-096-208 for
isolation transformer installation instructions.
5. LED 09 (PSTU or PEKU) or LED 10 (PSTU or PESU) in Program 10-2 must be ON to enable
the BGM connection
6. BGM cannot be connected to the PDKU.
Important 7. If BGM source is not connected to PEKU, PESU, or PSTU, assign Slot 01 as data in Program
19-1. This will insure that there is not a mis-operation of PSTU ports caused by corrupted data
in RAM. Assigning BGM to Slot 01 will not affect the operation of EKT or DKT stations connected
to PEKU or PDKU circuits in Slot 01.
2-67
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 20
PDKU DATA PORT CONFIGURATION (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
A
S
2
0
H
S
#
LED
X
LED ON
PDKU Port Number
LED OFF
LED
X
Z
Z
LEDs 1 ~ 5 defines data port type;
LEDs 17 ~ 20 assigns data port to security group.
Select = PDKU Port Number that is connected
to PDIU-DS or to DKT with PDIU-DI.
PDKU Port Number
H
LED ON
PDKU Port Number
LED OFF
LED
X
LED ON
LED OFF
20
Data Security
Group 4
Not
Included
20
Data Security
Group 4
Not
Included
20
Data Security
Group 4
Not
Included
19
Data Security
Group 2
Not
Included
19
Data Security
Group 2
Not
Included
19
Data Security
Group 2
Not
Included
18
Data Security
Group 3
Not
Included
18
Data Security
Group 3
Not
Included
18
Data Security
Group 3
Not
Included
17
Data Security
Group 1
Not
Included
17
Data Security
Group 1
Not
Included
17
Data Security
Group 1
Not
Included
16
16
16
15
15
15
14
14
14
13
13
13
12
12
12
11
11
11
10
10
10
09
09
09
08
08
08
07
07
07
06
DTR Pulse with
Data Release (R4)
No DTR
Pulse
06
DTR Pulse with
Data Release (R4)
No DTR
Pulse
06
DTR Pulse with
Data Release (R4)
No DTR
Pulse
05
Auto Pause 4
Behind PBX
No Auto
Pause
05
Auto Pause 4
Behind PBX
No Auto
Pause
05
Auto Pause 4
Behind PBX
No Auto
Pause
04
PDIU-DS
Connected
PDIU-DI
Connected
04
DIU-DS
Connected
DIU-DI
Connected
04
DIU-DS
Connected
DIU-DI
Connected
03
PDIU-DS to
Modem
Connection
PDIU-DS to other
type DCE or DTE
03
DIU-DS to
Modem
Connection
DIU-DS to other
type DCE or DTE
03
DIU-DS to
Modem
Connection
DIU-DS to other
type DCE or DTE
02
AT Commands
and Result Codes
AT Commands
Only
02
AT Commands
and Result Codes
AT DIAL
Command Only
02
AT Commands
and Result Codes
AT DIAL
Command Only
01
DIU
Connected
No DIU
Connected
01
DIU
Connected
No DIU
Connected
01
DIU
Connected
No DIU
Connected
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data: LED 17 ON, all others OFF.
3. Copy this page if more than three DIUs are installed.
4. Auto pause will be inserted after a Centrex or PBX access code is dialed by a DIU: CO line must be assigned in Program 42-0, and must have
access code assigned in Program 42 (1 ~ 8). Pause time is determined by Program 12-3. A pause will also be inserted after the DK CO line access
code is dialed (by the DIU) in all cases if LED 05 is turned on.
5. DIUs cannot be connected To PDKU1A Circuit 8, but can be connected to all PDKU2A circuits. DIUs cannot be connected to PDKUs in DK96
Slots 11 ~ 14.
6. If a PDIU-DS is connected to a modem, turn LED 06 ON to cause the modem to disconnect the line when the user presses the DataÍRelease
(DRLS) button. The modem should be sent AT command "AT & D2" so it can recognize DTR pulse, and the PDIU-DS SW1-2 switch must be
OFF (in the up position). This feature is for outgoing modem calls only—DTR will not pulse on incoming modem calls. Always change the modem
escape sequence from "+ + +" to some other character using the ATS2 = __ command to allow the modem to be put into the command mode
while the DIU remains in the communication mode.
2-68
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 21
MODEM POOL PORT ASSIGNMENTS (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
A
S
2
1
H
S
#
PDKU/PDIU-DS, Port Number
PDKU/PDIU-DS
Port Number
H
Z
Z
PSTU or PESU/Modem Port Number
PSTU or PESU /Modem
Port Number
Assignment 1
Assignment 2
Assignment 3
Assignment 4
Assignment 5
Assignment 6
Assignment 7
Assignment 8
Assignment 9
Assignment 10
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data is blank.
3. Copy this page if more than 10 modems are assigned to modem pool.
4. This program is available with Release 3 and higher software.
5. DIUs can be connected to any ports associated with PDKU circuits, except for ports associated with Circuit 8 on
a PDKU1A. All PDKU2A circuits can support DIUs.
2-69
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 22
DATA INTERFACE UNIT (DIU) STATION HUNTING (DATA CALLS ONLY) (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
A
S
2
2
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the PDKU/DIU
port number of the “hunt-from”
station. See Note 3 for
entering a range of ports.
Port
H
Z
Z
HUNT TO = (00~95)
Enter the “hunt-to”
PDKU/DIU port
number. See Note 4.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Hunt To
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data does not assign "hunt-to" points to any port.
3. A range of ports may be assigned by pressing the following key sequence:
*
Low port
High port
4. Press Button/LED 01 to delete a digit from "hunt-to" port.
5. Program 22 applies to PDIU-DI and PDIU-DS data stations. If programming a
PDIU-DI station, use the associated digital telephone port number; the PDIU-DS
is programmed using its own unique port number.
2-70
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 28
DSS CONSOLE/ATTENDANT TELEPHONE ASSIGNMENTS
A
S
2
8
H
S
H
SELECT = (1~4)
Enter the DSS
console number.
See Note 3.
DDSS PDKU/
HDSS PEKU PCBs
(Lowest Slot to Highest)
9
DDSS/HDSS
Console
Number
Low Slot Number:
1
Slot Number:
2
Slot Number:
3
High Slot Number:
4
Z
Z
DSS ATT = (1~4)
Enter the attendant digital or electronic
telephone number. See Notes 4 and 5.
Attendant Digital/
ElectronicTelephone
Number
(1, 2, 3 or 4)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. A digital DSS console (DDSS console) can be assigned to an electronic telephone, and an electronic DSS console
(HDSS console) can be assigned to a digital telephone. DDSS consoles are supported by PCTU3 and PCTU4 only;
HDSS consoles are supported by PCTU1, PCTU2, PCTU3, PCTU4, and PCTUS.
3. Refer to Program 03, Flexible PCB Slot Assignments, for the PCB slots of PEKUs and PDKUs configured to support
consoles.
4. The system automatically assigns the console supported by the PEKU or PDKU in the lowest-number PCB slot to
be Console number 1. See Note 8.
5. The system automatically assigns the telephone connected to the first station port on a console PDKU or PEKU to
be attendant number 1. See Note 8.
6. If more than one console is associated with one attendant telephone, then specify the same number attendant
telephone for all consoles associated with it.
7. Shaded information is for configuration purposes only.
8. Initialized data assigns Console #1 to Attendant Telephone #1; Console #2 to Attendant Telephone #2; Console #3
to Attendant Telephone #3; and Console #4 to Attendant Telephone #4.
9. Console #4 is not available with PCTUS PCB.
2-71
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 29-1
DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
CONSOLE 1
A
S
2
9
H
S
1
H
SELECT = 1
DDSS/HDSS Number 1~4:
Each system can have up to four consoles.
Enter the console to which buttons are being
assigned (DDSS/HDSS Console 1).
DDSS/HDSS Button Group 1~3:
Each console has three groups
of 20 LED buttons. Choose
the group to be assigned.
No. 01 ~ No. 20
Press the LED that is
in the same position as
the console button being
assigned. The LED
lights and the LCD
displays the console
button’s number.
Z
Z
Code:
Assign the appropriate Speed
Dial, CO line access, or DSS
access code to the button
chosen. See Code Table
below for the buttons to
enter. See Notes 4 and 5.
Console 1
Group No. 1
Button/Code
Group No. 2
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Group No. 3
Button/Code
Key/Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
Code Table
Button Type
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
CO Line Access
Code
*10 ~ * 49
*60 ~ * 99
01 ~ 36
DSS (Station Access) #00 ~ #95
All Call
89
Night Transfer 1
91
Night Transfer 2
92
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data associates the PDKU's or PEKU's console with the
telephone connected to PDKU's or PEKU's first port. See Program 28 to
reassign consoles to other telephones.
3. When assigning CO line access buttons (01 ~ 36), the associated
telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40.
4. The NightÍTransfer (NT) and AllÍCallÍPage (AC) buttons may be
changed to DSS, Line (CO) or SD buttons, but they may not be
reassigned to other button locations.
5 Initialized key assignments are shown following the Program 29 System
Record Sheets.
6. Important: Only program SD, Line (CO), DSS, AllÍCallÍPage (AC),
and NightÍTransfer (NT) buttons; programming other feature buttons
on a console may cause system operation problems.
2-72
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 29-2
DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
CONSOLE 2
A
S
2
9
H
S
2
H
SELECT = 2
DDSS/HDSS Number 1~4:
Each system can have up to four consoles.
Enter the console to which buttons are being
assigned (DDSS/HDSS Console 2).
DDSS/HDSS Button Group 1~3:
Each console has three groups
of 20 LEDs/buttons. Choose
the group to be assigned.
No. 01 ~ No. 20
Press the LED that is
in the same position as
the console button being
assigned. The LED
lights and the LCD
displays the console
button’s number.
Z
Z
Code:
Assign the appropriate Speed
Dial, CO line access, or DSS
access code to the key
chosen. See Code Table
below for the buttons to
enter. See Notes 4 and 5.
Console 2
Group No. 1
Button/Code
Group No. 2
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Group No. 3
Button/Code
Button/Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
Code Table
Button Type
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
CO Line Access
Code
*10 ~ * 49
*60 ~ * 99
01 ~ 36
DSS (Station Access) #00 ~ #95
All Call
89
Night Transfer 1
91
Night Transfer 2
92
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data associates the PDKU's or PEKU's console with the
telephone connected to PDKU's or PEKU's first port. See Program 28
to reassign consoles to other telephones.
3. When assigning CO line access buttons (01 ~ 36), the associated
telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40.
4. The NightÍTransfer (NT) and AllÍCallÍPage (AC) buttons may be
changed to DSS, Line (CO) or SD buttons, but they may not be
reassigned to other button locations.
5 Initialized key assignments are shown following the Program 29 System
Record Sheets.
6. Important: Only program SD, Line (CO), DSS, AllÍCallÍPage (AC),
and NightÍTransfer (NT) buttons; programming other feature buttons
on a console may cause system operation problems.
2-73
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 29-3
DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
CONSOLE 3
A
S
2
9
H
S
3
H
Z
Z
Code:
Assign the appropriate Speed
Dial, CO line access, or DSS
access code to the button chosen.
See Code Table below for the
buttons to enter. See Notes
4 and 5.
SELECT = 3
DDSS/HDSS Number 1~4:
Each system can have up to four consoles.
Enter the console to which buttons are being
assigned (DDSS/HDSS Console 2).
No. 01 ~ No. 20
Press the LED that is
in the same position as
the console button being
DDSS/HDSS Button Group 1~3: assigned. The LED
Each console has three groups
lights and the LCD
of 20 LEDs/buttons. Choose
displays the console
the group to be assigned.
button’s number.
Console 3
Group No. 1
Button/Code
Group No. 2
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Group No. 3
Button/Code
Button/Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
Code Table
Button Type
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
CO Line Access
Code
*10 ~ * 49
*60 ~ * 99
01 ~ 36
DSS (Station Access) #00 ~ #95
All Call
89
Night Transfer 1
91
Night Transfer 2
92
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data associates the PDKU's or PEKU's console with the
telephone connected to PDKU's or PEKU's first port. See Program 28
to reassign consoles to other telephones.
3. When assigning CO line access buttons (01 ~ 36), the associated
telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40.
4. The NightÍTransfer (NT) and AllÍCallÍPage (AC) buttons may be
changed to DSS, Line (CO) or SD buttons, but they may not be
reassigned to other button locations.
5 Initialized key assignments are shown following the Program 29 System
Record Sheets.
6. Important: Only program SD, Line (CO), DSS, AllÍCallÍPage (AC),
and NightÍTransfer (NT) buttons; programming other feature buttons
on a console may cause system operation problems.
2-74
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 29-4
DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
CONSOLE 4
A
S
2
9
H
S
4
H
SELECT = 4
DDSS/HDSS Number 1~4:
Each system can have up to four consoles.
Enter the console to which buttons are being
assigned (DDSS/HDSS Console 2).
No. 01 ~ No. 20
Press the LED that is
in the same position as
the console button being
assigned. The LED
lights and the LCD
displays the console
button’s number.
DDSS/DSS Button Group 1~3:
Each console has three groups
of 20 LEDs/buttons. Choose
the group to be assigned.
Z
Z
Code:
Assign the appropriate Speed
Dial, CO line access, or DSS
access code to the key
chosen. See Code Table
below for the buttons to
enter. See Notes 4 and 5.
Console 4
Group No. 1
Button/Code
Group No. 2
Button/Code
Button/Code
Button/Code
Group No. 3
Button/Code
Button/Code
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
Code Table
Button Type
Station Speed Dial
System Speed Dial
CO Line Access
Code
*10 ~ * 49
*60 ~ * 99
01 ~ 36
DSS (Station Access) #00 ~ #95
All Call
89
Night Transfer 1
91
Night Transfer 2
92
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data associates the PDKU's or PEKU's console with the
telephone connected to PDKU's or PEKU's first port. See Program 28
to reassign consoles to other telephones.
3. When assigning CO line access buttons (01 ~ 36), the associated
telephone must be assigned access to the CO line also. See Program 40.
4. The NightÍTransfer (NT) and AllÍCallÍPage (AC) buttons may be
changed to DSS, Line (CO) or SD buttons, but they may not be
reassigned to other button locations.
5 Initialized key assignments are shown following the Program 29 System
Record Sheets.
6. Important: Only program SD, Line (CO), DSS, AllÍCallÍPage (AC),
and NightÍTransfer (NT) buttons; programming other feature buttons
on a console may cause system operation problems.
7. Console 4 is not available with PCTUS.
2-75
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 29
INITIALIZED DSS CONSOLE BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS
PCTU (1, 2, 3, or 4)
#09
#19
#29
#39
#49
NT 1(91)
#08
#18
#28
#38
#48
AC (89)
#07
#17
#27
#37
#47
#57
#06
#16
#26
#36
#46
#56
#05
#15
#25
#35
#45
#55
#04
#14
#24
#34
#44
#54
#03
#13
#23
#33
#43
#53
#02
#12
#22
#32
#42
#52
#01
#11
#21
#31
#41
#51
#00
#10
#20
#30
#40
#50
NT 1(91)
PCTUS1
#09
#19
*15
*25
*35
#08
#18
14
24
34
#07
#17
13
23
33
* 43
#06
#16
12
22
32
42
#05
#15
11
21
31
41
#04
#14
*10
20
30
40
#03
#13
#23
19
29
39
#02
#12
#22
18
28
38
#01
#11
#21
17
27
37
#00
#10
#20
*16
*26
* 36
Speed Dial Keys
2-76
AC(89)
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 30
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
(PORTS 00 ~ 31)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads LEDs 01, 05, 07, and 12 ON for all ports.
3. Ports 32 ~ 95 on next page. The same notes apply to all ports.
4. A range of ports may be specified by entering
5. If this LED is turned OFF, OCA and Busy Override must be accessed manually by dialing 2. If kept ON, ACB and Executive
Override cannot be accessed.
6. If all stations are allowed Privacy Override, (the system will be non-private), allowing up to three telephones to
talk on the same CO line.
7. See Program 10-2 to enable/disable Priv./Exec./DND Override warning tones.
8. Change DISA security code is available with Release 2 and higher software only. To change DISA code from selected
stations: Dial Intercom (INT) 6 5 8 + code + Redial (REDIAL).
9. DP or DTMF is specified for standard telephones only, PSTU or PESU (Circuits 1 and 2).
10. To change a 4-digit Traveling Class Override (T.C.O.) code: Dial Intercom (INT) + o
+ code + Redial (REDIAL).
o
= 6 2 2 - Class 1, 6 2 3 - Class 2, 6 2 4 - Class 3, 6 2 5 - Class 4.
11. To change verified account codes from selected stations: Dial Intercom (INT) + 6 5 9 + Code Number (000 ~ 299) + code
12.
13.
14.
15.
(1 ~ 15 digits) + Redial (REDIAL). Note that the total account code digit length is set in Program 60-4; all digits do not
have to be verified.
To change the 4-digit T. R. override codes (1 or 2) from selected stations: Dial Intercom (INT) + 6 5 4 + code + Redial
(REDIAL); or dial Intercom (INT) + 6 5 5 + code + Redial (REDIAL).
Mic (MIC) ON/OFF at start of call (LED 03 ON = Mic ON, LED 03 OFF = Mic OFF) is only in effect if Mic (MIC) button
lock is enabled (LED 02 = ON).
There are nine digital telephone handset receiver volume levels, 1 ~ 9 (9 being the highest). The initial off-hook level
can be set anywhere from level 2 to 5. Set the initial level with one of the following combinations: Level 2 = 12 OFF/
13 OFF; Level 3 = 12 ON/13 OFF (default level); Level 4 = 12 OFF/13 ON;
Level 5 = 12 ON/13 ON. It is not required to cycle system power for the data to take effect.
Light LEDs 08 and 14 for Port 99 to require DISA callers to dial Verified Forced Account Codes before accessing
2-77
outgoing CO lines.
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 30
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
(PORTS 32 ~ 95)
Feature
Port Numbers 32~63
Key
LED 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
Dial Pulse (DTMF Off) 9
11
Change DISA Security Code (R2) 8 10
Change TR Override Code12
09
Forced Account Code
08
OCA/Busy Override Automatic 5
07
ABR Access Enabled
06
Speed Dial Allowed
05
Priv. Override Allowed 7
Exec. Override Allowed 7
DND Override Allowed 7
Change T.C.O. Code (R3) 10
Change Verified A.C. (R3) 11
Account Codes Verified (R3)
Digital Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3) 14
Digital Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3) 14
04
MIC on at Start of Call 13
MIC Key Lock Enabled 13
Speakerphone Enabled
Feature
Priv. Override Allowed 7
Exec. Override Allowed 7
DND Override Allowed 7
Change T.C.O. Code (R3) 10
Change Verified A.C. (R3) 11
Account Codes Verified (R3)
Digital Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3) 14
Digital Tele. Recv. Vol. (R3) 14
03
02
01
Port Numbers 64~95
Key
LED 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 99
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
Dial Pulse (DTMF Off) 9
11
Change DISA Security Code (R2) 8 10
Change TR Override Code12
09
Forced Acc't Code
08
OCA/Busy Override Automatic 5
07
ABR Access Enabled
06
Speed Dial Allowed
05
04
MIC on at Start of Call 13
03
MIC Key Lock Enabled 13
02
Speakerphone Enabled
01
Notes from page 2-76 apply.
2-78
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 31
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
(PORTS 00 ~ 31)
A
S
3
1
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number(s)
Enter the port number(s)
to which class of service
must be assigned.
See Note 4 for entering
a range of ports.
Feature
20
19
18
17
16
Toshiba VP8 Integration (A/D)
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
VM Group 2
VM Group 1
VM to VM Call Blocking (R3) 6
OCA Enabled (Receive)
Handsfree No Warning
Handsfree Disabled
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs
Light LEDs for the port specified in
the last step. All buttons/LEDs marked with
an “X” in the table below should be lit.
Port Numbers 00~31
LED 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Toshiba VP8 (B + Station No.)
Toshiba VP8 (B No Station)
Block Exec./Priv. Ovr. 7
End/End Signal Rcv (VM)
Receive VM ID Code
Group Page 4 - EKTs/DKTs
Group Page 3 - EKTs/DKTs
Group Page 2 - EKTs/DKTs
Group Page 1 - EKTs/DKTs
All Call Page Allowed - EKTs/DKTs
VM (No Conference)
VM Group 4
VM Group 3
H
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads LED 10 ON for all ports.
3. Ports 32 ~ 95 on next page. The same notes apply.
4. A range of ports may be specified by entering:
*
Low port
5.
6.
7.
8.
High port
If LED 15 is lit, LED 17 must be lit.
If LED 19 is lit, LED 17 must be lit.
If LED 20 is lit, LEDs 17 and 19 must both be lit.
VM to VM call block should be ON for all VM (PSTU/PESU) ports if the VM/auto attendant machine does supervised and/
or screened transfer.
Block Exec./Priv. Override (LED 18 ON) prevents Privacy Override to the selected station unless the
PrivacyÍRelease (PRV/RLS) button is ON at that station; this option (LED 18 ON) prevents executive override to the
station under all conditions.
Also for INTOUCH systems operating with Release B.06 and higher.
2-79
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 31
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
(PORTS 32 ~ 95)
Feature
Port Numbers 32 ~ 63
Key
LED 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Toshiba VP8 (B + Station No.)
Toshiba VP8 (B No Station)
20
Block Exec./Priv. Ovr. 7
18
17
19
End/End Signal Rcv. (VM)
Receive VM ID Code
16
Toshiba VP 8 Integration (A/D) 15
Group Page 4 - EKTs/DKTs
14
Group Page 3 - EKTs/DKTs
Group Page 2 - EKTs/DKTs
Group Page 1 - EKTs/DKTs
All Call Page Allowed - EKTs/DKTs
VM (No Conference)
VM Group 4
VM Group 3
VM Group 2
VM Group 1
VM to VM Call Blocking (R3) 6
OCA Enabled (Receive)
Handsfree No Warning
Handsfree Disabled
Feature
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
Port Numbers 64 ~ 95
Key
LED 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
Toshiba VP8 (B + Station No.)
Toshiba VP8 (B No Station)
20
19
18
Block Exec./Priv. Ovr. 7
17
End/End Signal Rcv. (VM)
16
Receive VM ID Code
Toshiba VP 7 Integration (A/D) 15
14
Group Page 4 - EKTs/DKTs
13
Group Page 3 - EKTs/DKTs
12
Group Page 2 - EKTs/DKTs
11
Group Page 1 - EKTs/DKTs
All Call Page Allowed - EKTs/DKTs 10
VM (No Conference)
09
VM Group 4
08
VM Group 3
07
VM Group 2
06
VM Group 1
05
VM to VM Call Blocking (R3) 6 04
OCA Enabled (Receive)
03
Handsfree No Warning
02
Handsfree Disabled
01
Notes from page 2-79 apply.
2-80
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 32
AUTOMATIC PREFERENCE
A
S
3
2
H
SELECT = Port Number
Enter the port number of the
station having preference defined.
See Note 3 below for entering
a range of ports.
Port
Number
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Ringing
Code
(0 or 1)
Automatic
Preference
Code
S
#
H
DATA = Ringing Code
Enter 0 to disable Ringing Line Preference.
Enter 1 to enable Ringing Line Preference.
Port
Number
Ringing
Code
(0 or 1)
Automatic
Preference
Code
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Z
Z
Automatic Preference Code:
Enter 00 for no selection.
Enter 01 for intercom.
Enter 02 for lowest CO line.
Enter 11 ~ 18 for Line Groups 1~ 8.
Port
Number
Ringing
Code
(0 or 1)
Automatic
Preference
Code
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns Ringing Code 1 and Automatic Off-hook (Preference) Code 00 for all ports. Power up sequence assigns Automatic Offhook (Preference) Code 01 to programming Port 05.
3. To enter a range of ports dial the following key sequence:
4. Automatic Preference applies to going off-hook and
pressing the Spkr (SPEAKER) button.
5. This program applies to electronic and digital telephones
Low port
High port
only; standard telephones always select the system
intercom path when going off-hook.
*
2-81
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 33
STATION HUNTING (VOICE CALLS ONLY)
A
S
3
3
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the port number
of the “hunt-from” station.
See Note 3 for entering
a range of ports.
Port
H
Z
Z
HUNT TO = (00~95)
Enter the “hunt-to”
port number.
See Note 4.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Hunt To
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data does not assign "hunt-to" points to any port.
3. A range of ports may be assigned by pressing the following key sequence:
*
Low port
High port
4. Press button LED 01 to delete a digit from the "hunt-to" port.
5. If a hunt station is in Call Forward mode, calls will be directed to the forwarded
destination.
6. CO lines will hunt if they are programmed to ring at the hunt station only;
CO lines that ring at more than one station in any given ring program (81-89) will
not hunt.
2-82
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 34
HOLD/PARK RECALL TIMING
A
S
3
4
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the port number having
its Hold/Park Recall Time defined.
See Note 4 for entering a
range of ports.
Port
H
Z
Z
HOLD TIME = Seconds
Enter the number of seconds the
system will wait. Use three digits.
Acceptable range is 000 or
011~160. See Note 3.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Seconds
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns a Hold /Park Recall Time of 032 seconds to all ports.
3. Enter 000 for no Hold Recall. Enter 011~160 for 11 to 160 seconds.
4. Enter a range of ports by keying in the following sequence:
*
Low port
High port
2-83
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 35
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
(PORTS 00 ~ 31)
A
S
3
5
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the port number(s) being
defined. See Note 3 for
entering a range of ports.
Feature
Busy Station Transfer (R4)7
Busy Station Ringing (R4)8
Automatic Hold (R4)
H
Z
Z
LED
Select LEDs to light for the port specified in the
last step. All LEDs marked with an “X” in the table
below should be lit.
Port Numbers (00~31)
LED 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
20
19
18
17
No CF/NA Handsfree (R4)
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
LCD Indiv. Message 4
Message Waiting (RCV)
07
06
05
04
03
LCD Type/32-ON/12-OFF 5
LCD Display 5
02
01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads LED 05 lit for Ports 00~15 with PCTU (1, 2, 3, or 4) and Ports 00 ~ 05 with PCTUS; and
Initialized data reads LEDs 01, 02, and 04 lit for ports 00~95.
3. Enter a range of ports by keying in the following sequence:
*
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Low port
High port
The maximum number of LCD stations that may be assigned personal message/speed dial memos/timed reminder
memos is 16 with PCTU (1, 2, 3, or 4), and 6 with PCTUS. Initialized data assigns the lowest port numbers: 00
~ 15 with PCTU; 00 ~ 05 with PCTUS.
LEDs 01, 02, and 04 should be lit for all stations that use voice mail to allow proper voice mail integration.
LEDs 01 and 02 should be lit for all stations (even nonLCD), unless it is desired to disable the LCD and message
waiting indication.
Ports 32 ~ 95 are found on the next page. The same notes apply.
This applies to ports — typically voice mail/auto attendant ones — that transfer CO line calls.
This applies to ports that must be available to receive calls when they are busy.
2-84
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 35
STATION CLASS OF SERVICE
(PORTS 32 ~ 95)
Feature
Busy Station Transfer (R4)7
Busy Station Ringing (R4)8
Auto Hold (R4)
No CF/NA Handsfree (R4)
LCD Indiv. Message 4
Message Waiting (RCV)
LCD Type/32-ON/12-OFF 5
LCD Display 5
Feature
Busy Station Transfer (R4)7
Busy Station Ringing (R4)8
Auto Hold (R4)
No CF/NA Handsfree (R4)
LCD Indiv. Message 4
Message Waiting (RCV)
LCD Type/32-ON/12-OFF 5
LCD Display 5
Port Numbers (32~63)
LED 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
Port Numbers (64~95)
LED 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
Notes from page 2-84 apply.
2-85
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 36
FIXED CALL FORWARD (VOICE CALLS ONLY)
A
S
3
6
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the port number of the
station that needs a Fixed
Call Forward location
assigned. See Note 3 for
a range of ports.
Port
H
Z
Z
FORWARD TEL = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the port number of
the station or VM port that
will be call forwarded to
when the Fixed Call Forward
button is pressed.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Foward
Tel
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data does not assign a Fixed Call Forward location to any port.
3. To enter a range of ports, key in the following sequence:
*
Low port
High port
4. Press Button/LED 01 to enter blanks.
5. See Program 39, Code 86, to assign Fixed Call Forward buttons on digital and
electronic telephones.
6. Fixed Call Forward will forward all calls to the designated port.
7. Stations that have Fixed Call Forward set will not ring.
8. Program 92-9 does not clear Fixed Call Forward memory.
2-86
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 37
RING TRANSFER (CAMP-ON) RECALL TIME
A
S
3
7
H
S
#
H
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the number of the port that
needs a Ring Transfer Recall time
assigned. See Note 3 for
entering a range of ports.
Port
Z
Z
HOLD TIME = Ring Transfer Recall Time
Enter the Ring Transfer Recall
Time (in seconds). The acceptable
range is 011 ~ 999 seconds. Use
three digits.
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Hold
Time
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns a Ring Transfer Recall Time of 032 seconds to all ports.
3. To enter a range of ports, key in the sequence:
*
Low port
High port
4. Ring Transfer Recall Time is the time it takes to recall a station that originates an unanswered or busy (campedon) transferred call.
5. Ring Transfer must be allowed (Program 10-1, LED 07 ON) for Transfer Recall to function; otherwise Recall will
be immediate.
6. Ring Transfer to stations in the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode is not allowed, and stations that attempt to do so will
be recalled immediately, no matter what time is set with this program.
2-87
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 38
DIGITAL AND ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE KEYSTRIP TYPE
A
S
3
8
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number (00~95)
Enter the port number of the
station that needs a keystrip
defined. See Note 4 for
entering a range of ports.
Port
H
Z
Z
KEY MENU = Code
Enter the appropriate code as follows:
Telephone Type
10-button
20-button (A)
20-button (B)
20-button (C)
Code
21
31
32
33
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Key Menu
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns Code 31 to all ports.
3. Always complete Program 38 before proceeding to Program 39.
4. To enter a range of ports, key in the sequence:
*
Low port
High port
2-88
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 38 (continued)
ELECTRONIC AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE KEYSTRIP TYPE
5. The Release 4 code assignments for 2000-series Digital Telpehone keystrips are as follows:
Speed Dial
Line 9
Speed Dial
Do Not Disturb
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
Line 7
Line 17
Line 6
Line 6
Line 16
Line 5
Line 5
Line 15
Line 4
Line 4
Line 14
Line 3
Line 3
Line 13
Line 2
Line 2
Line 12
Line 1
Line 1
Line 11
Intercom
Intercom
Line 10
Code 21
10-button
Code 31(Default)
20-button (A)
Line 9
Speed Dial
SD 10
Flash
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
SD 14
Line 7
Speed Dial
Line 6
SD 13
Line 6
Redial
Line 5
SD 12
Line 5
Spd Dial Pause
Line 4
SD 11
Line 4
SD 15
Line 3
SD 10
Line 3
SD 14
Line 2
Line 12
Line 2
SD 13
Line 1
Line 11
Line 1
SD 12
Intercom
Line 10
Intercom
SD 11
Code 32
20-button (B)
Code 33
20-button (C)
(Keystrip not provided, but can be assigned)
NOTE: The Speed Dial button is the same as the SDS or REP buttons in previous STRATA systems
(Program 39, Code 97).
6. The Release 4 code assignments for 1000-series digital telephone keystrips are as follows:
CO15
CO16
CO17
DND
SDS
SD12
SD13
SD14
DND
SDS
PAU
RDL
SDS
DND
FLASH
CO10
CO11
CO12
CO13
CO14
CO10
CO11
CO12
SD10
SD11
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
SD10
INT
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
INT
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
INT
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
Code 31 (Default)
20-key (A)
Code 32
20-key (B)
2-89
Code 33
20-key (C)
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 38 (continued)
ELECTRONIC AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE KEYSTRIP TYPE
7. The Release 3 code assignments for 2000-series digital telephone keystrips are as follows:
Flash
Line 9
Flash
Do Not Disturb
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
Line 7
Line 17
Line 6
Line 6
Line 16
Line 5
Line 5
Line 15
Line 4
Line 4
Line 14
Line 3
Line 3
Line 13
Line 2
Line 2
Line 12
Line 1
Line 1
Line 11
Intercom
Intercom
Line 10
Code 21
10-button
Code 31 (Default)
20-button (A)
Line 9
Flash
SD 10
Flash
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 8
Do Not Disturb
Line 7
SD 14
Line 7
SD Select
Line 6
SD 13
Line 6
Redial
Line 5
SD 12
Line 5
Spd Dial Pause
Line 4
SD 11
Line 4
SD 15
Line 3
SD 10
Line 3
SD 14
Line 2
Line 12
Line 2
SD 13
Line 1
Line 11
Line 1
SD 12
Intercom
Line 10
Intercom
SD 11
Code 32
20-button (B)
Code 33
20-button (C)
(Keystrip not provided, but can be assigned)
8. The Release 3 code assignments for 1000-series digital telephone keystrips are as follows:
CO15
CO16
CO17
DND
FLASH
SD12
SD13
SD14
DND
FLASH
PAU
RDL
SDS
DND
FLASH
CO10
CO11
CO12
CO13
CO14
CO10
CO11
CO12
SD10
SD11
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
CO9
CO5
CO6
CO7
CO8
SD10
INT
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
INT
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
INT
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
Code 31 (Default)
20-key (A)
Code 32
20-key (B)
2-90
Code 33
20-key (C)
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 38 (continued)
ELECTRONIC AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE KEYSTRIP TYPE
9. The electronic telephone keystrip code assignments for Releases 1 ~ 4 are as follows:
CO9 MW/FL
CO8
DND
CO7 CO17
CO6 CO16
CO5 CO15
CO4 CO14
CO3 CO13
CO2 CO12
CO1 CO11
INT
CO10
Code 31 (Default)
20-key (A)
MW/FL
DND
CO7
CO6
CO5
CO4
CO3
CO2
CO1
INT
Code 21
10-key
CO9 MW/FL
CO8
DND
CO7
SD14
CO6
SD13
CO5
SD12
CO4
SD11
CO3
SD10
CO2 CO12
CO1 CO11
INT
CO10
Code 32
20-key (B)
SD10 MW/FL
CO8
DND
CO7
SDS
CO6
RDL
CO5
PAU
CO4
SD15
CO3
SD14
CO2
SD13
CO1
SD12
INT
SD11
Code 33
20-key (C)
10. The programming templates are as follows:
10
20
09
19
08
18
07
17
06
16
05
15
04
14
16
17
18
19
20
03
13
11
12
13
14
15
02
12
06
07
08
09
10
01
11
01
02
03
04
05
2000-Series Digital Telephone
6500-Series Electronic Telephone
1000-Series Digital Telephone
2-91
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 39
FLEXIBLE KEY ASSIGNMENT REFERENCE GUIDE
A
S
3
9
H
S
SELECT = Port Number
or range. See Note 4.
Button
Function
#
Press LED/button to
be defined. See tables
on the following pages.
Button
Labels
Code
Account
Code (R3)
Account Code
or ACCOUNT
50
Allows a Voluntary Account
Code to be entered
Alarm
Alarm Reset
or ALRM
77
Resets alarm
condition system wide
All Call
Voice Page
All Call Page
or AC
89
Pages all idle electronic/digital
telephones over speaker
Automatic
Busy Redial
Auto Busy Redial
or ABR
70
Sets ABR of busy outgoing
number
Intercom
LCD Message
H
Z
Code:
Enter the appropriate code that corresponds
to the feature to be assigned. See the
feature code reference table below.
Button
Function
Button
Labels
Door Lock 1 thru
Door Lock 4
(HDCB 1 ~ 4,
R2) (DDCB 1 ~ 4,
R4)
Unlock Door 1
or DRLK 1
Unlock Door 2
or DRLK 2
Unlock Door 3
or DRLK 3
Unlock Door 4
or DRLK 4
Notes
Z
Code
Notes
72
73
74
Momentarily unlocks door
(3 or 6 sec.). See Prog. 77-1
and 77-2.
75
Intercom
or INT
00
Intercom line access key
MSG
81
Begins LCD message
selection
Flash
or MW/FL
99
Provides message waiting
LED for EKT and Flash key
Microphone
Cut-off
Microphn Cut-off
or MCO
88
Modem (R3)
Modem
or MODEM
55
Night Transfer
Tenant 1
Night Transfer 1
or NT1
91
Sets Tenant 1 CO
DAY/NIGHT ringing mode
Night Transfer
Tenant 2
Night Transfer 2
or NT2
92
Sets Tenant 2 CO
DAY/NIGHT ringing mode
Forwards calls to selected
station if station does not answer
Pause
Spd Dial Pause
or PAU
95
Sets a pause in Speed
Dial. See Program 12-3
Picks up ringing or held intercom,
CO calls, and page
Pause (Long)
84
Spd Dial Lng Pause
or PAU/L
93
Sets a 10-second pause
in Speed Dial
PKUP1
83
Picks up tenant 1
ringing CO calls
Pooled Line
Pooled Line Grp
or PL
61 ~
68
Call Pickup
Tenant 2
PKUP2
82
Picks up tenant 2
ringing CO calls
Privacy (R3)
Privacy On Line
or PRIVACY
53
Prevents Privacy Override
(not Exc. Over.)
Line 1 ~ 36
or CO 01 ~
CO 36
Privacy Release
or PRV RLS
79
01 ~ 36
CO line access of
appearing calls
Privacy Release
CO Line
Appearance
Changes station Privacy
mode to Non-private for COs
RDL
(EKT only)
96
Data Call
or DATA
Redial Last
Number ( # key)
Redials the last
number
56
Release Call
or RLS
76
Data Release
or DRLS
Releases current call
and makes station idle
54
Save Last Number
or SAVE
85
Saves last number dialed
for future speed dial
DSS
#00 ~
#95
Speed Dial
Select ( * key)
Speed Dial
or SDS
97
Begins speed dial
selection
Station Speed
Dial Codes
SD
*10 ~
* 49
Reserves key for
station speed dial
System Speed
Dial Codes
SD
*60 ~
* 99
Speed dial number set
by station port #00
Tone Dial Select
or TONE
90
CO dial signals set to
tone or pulse
Automatic
Callback Busy
Auto Callback
or ACB
94
Sets ACB for station
recalled by busy line
Background
Music
Tel Set Music
or BGM
78
Turns BGM ON or OFF
through station speaker
Call Forward
All Calls
Call Frwd All Calls
or CFAC
87
All calls forward to selected
station
Call Forward
A.C. Fixed
Call Frwd to:
or CFF
86
Forwards all calls to pre-defined
destination. See Prog. 36
Call Forward
Busy (R2)
Call Frwd Busy
or CFB
59
Forwards calls to selected
station if station is busy
Call Forward
Busy/No
Answer (R2)
Call Frwd Busy/
NAns
or CFB/NA
57
Forwards calls to selected
station if station is busy or
does not answer
Call Forward
No Answer
(R2)
Call Frwd
No Answer
or CFNA
58
Directed Pickup
or PKUP
Call Pickup
Tenant 1
Call
Pickup
Data (R3)
Data Release
(R3)
Direct Station
Selection
Do Not
Disturb
Do Not Disturb
or DND
Door Lock 0
Unlock Door 0
or DRLK 0
Message Waiting
and Flash
Used to place data call
Release (R2)
Releases data call
Save Last
Number
Assigns DSS hotline
keys to port number
98
Prevents calls to station
71
Momentarily unlocks door
(3 or 6 sec.) PIOUS/PIOU/PEPU
NOTES:
Tone
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Complete Program 38 before Program 39.
3. Initialized data assigns the keystrip pattern associated with Code 31 from Program 38.
4. Specify a range of ports by keying in
Low port
*
Sets microphone on/off for
incoming handsfree
intercom calls
Used to reserve modem
in modem pool
Multiple CO lines may
appear under one key
High port
5. Flash (FLASH) (MW/FL): Sets pauses in Speed Dial if telephone does not have a pause button. Sets flashes in Speed Dial numbers if telephone has a pause
button.
6. Redial (REDIAL or RDL) and SpeedÍDial (Speed DialÍSelect): Both buttons must be programmed on telephones; not allowed separately. Recommended
on all stations using voice mail, since they allow easy access of * and # DTMF buttons.
7. PooledÍLineÍGrp (PL): Codes 61 ~ 68 represent CO line groups 81 ~ 88. Maximum four PooledÍLineÍGrp (PL) buttons per pooled line group on each
station.
8. Redial is a fixed button on 2000-series Digital Telephones and REDIAL is a fixed button on 1000-series Digital telephones. Do not assign these buttons as
flexible buttons on these telephones.
2-92
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 39
FLEXIBLE KEY ASSIGNMENT FOR PORTS ____ TO ____
A
S
3
9
H
S
#
Port Number
BUTTON
CODE
BUTTON
H
Code
LED/Button
CODE
BUTTON
BUTTON
CODE
Privacy Release (PRV RLS)
79
00
RDL (Redial)3
96
LCD MSG Select
81
Release Call (RLS)
76
Save Last Number (SAVE)
85
83
Unlock Door 4 (DRLK 4)
75
77
PKUP2
82
Intercom (INT)
All Call Page (AC)
89
Line 1 ~ 36 CO 01 ~ CO 36
Auto Busy Redial (ABR)
70
Data Call (DATA)
Auto Callback (ACB)
94
Data Release (DRLS)
Tel Set Music (BGM)
78
DSS
Call Frwd All Calls (CFAC)
87
Call Frwd to _ (CFF)
86
50
Alarm Reset (ALRM)
(R3)
Call Frwd Busy (CFB)
59
(R2)
Call Frwd Busy/NAns (CFB/NA)
57
(R2)
Call Frwd No Answer (CFNA)
58
Directed Pickup (PKUP)
84
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
LCD
DIU
LOCATION:
Button
Code
(R2)
01 ~ 36
56
(R3)
Flash (MW/FL)
99
54
(R3)
Microphn Cut-off (MCO)
88
Modem (MODEM)
55
#00 ~
#95
Night Transfer 1 (NT1)
91
Do Not Disturb (DND)
98
Night Transfer 2 (NT2)
92
Unlock Door 0 (DRLK 0)
71
Spd Dial Pause (PAU)
95
Unlock Door 1 (DRLK 1)
72
(R2)
Spd Dial Lng Pause (PAU/L)
93
Unlock Door 2 (DRLK 2)
73
(R2)
Pooled Line Grp (PL)
Unlock Door 3 (DRLK 3)
74
(R2)
Privacy On Line (PRIVACY)
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
LCD
DIU
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
LOCATION:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Code
Button
Code
(R2)
97
Speed Dial (SDS)
(R3)
(SD) Stations
* 10 ~
* 49
(R2)
SD System
* 60 ~
* 99
Tone Dial Select (TONE)
53
LCD
DIU
(R3)
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
LCD
DIU
LOCATION:
Button
Code
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
LCD
DIU
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
LOCATION:
Button
Code
Button
Code
LCD
DIU
LOCATION:
Button
Code
Button
Code
LCD
DIU
LOCATION:
10
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
90
61 ~ 68
LOCATION:
Button
Z
SLOT NO. _______ .
CODE
PKUP1
Account Code (ACCOUNT)
Z
PORT NO. ____. 10
20
Code
LCD
DIU
LOCATION:
Button
Code
Button
Code
Button
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
09
19
09
19
09
19
09
19
08
18
08
18
08
18
08
18
07
17
07
17
07
17
07
17
06
16
06
16
06
16
06
16
05
15
05
15
05
15
05
15
04
14
04
14
04
14
04
14
03
13
03
13
03
13
03
13
02
12
02
12
02
12
02
12
01
11
01
11
01
11
01
11
Code
NOTES: 1. DSS buttons are used for voice calls only; SD buttons are used for voice and/or data calls.
2. To allow a station to set * and # DTMF tones in speed dial numbers, the station must have the SpeedÍDial
(SDS) and Redial (REDIAL) (RDL) buttons. Digital telephones only require the SpeedÍDial (SDS) button,
because the Redial (REDIAL) button is fixed on them. Digital telephones in Release 4 systems initialize with the
SpeedÍDial (SDS) button (see Program 38).
3. The Redial (REDIAL) button is fixed on digital telephones; do not assign this button as a flexible button on digital
telephones.
2-93
(R2)
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 40
STATION CO LINE ACCESS
(PORTS 00 ~ 35)
A
S
4
0
H
S
#
H
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Port Numbers
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Light LEDs for the port(s) specified.
Port Numbers 00~35
Button
CO LED 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Ports 36 ~ 71 on next page. The same notes apply.
3. Initialized data reads all LEDs ON for all CO lines. Complete CO line access is allowed on all ports.
4. Denying access in this program applies to all access options, including LCR.
5. This program also denies Pickup CO line access.
6. A range of ports may be entered by keying in:
*
Low port in range
2-94
High port in range
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 40
STATION CO LINE ACCESS
(PORTS 36 ~ 71)
A
S
4
0
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Port Numbers
H
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Light LEDs for the port(s) specified.
Button
Port Numbers 36~71
CO LED 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
NOTE: Ports 72 ~ 95 and 99 on next page. The same notes apply.
2-95
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 40
STATION CO LINE ACCESS
(PORTS 72 ~ 95, AND 99)
A
S
4
0
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Port Numbers
H
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Light LEDs for the port(s) specified.
Button
Port Numbers 72~95
CO LED 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 99
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
2-96
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 41
STATION OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION
(PORTS 00 ~ 35)
A
S
4
1
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Port Numbers
H
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Light LEDs for the port(s) to be restricted.
Button
Port Numbers 00~35
CO LED 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Ports 36 ~ 71 on next page. The same notes apply to all ports.
3. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines (all stations allowed outgoing access to all CO lines).
4. This program denies all outgoing calls, except when using Least Cost Routing.
5. A range of ports may be entered by keying in:
6. With Release 1 software, CO lines
restricted (LED ON) in Program 41
High port in range
may not be accessed for ABR calls;
Low
port
in
range
with Release 2 and higher, restricted CO lines
may be accessed for ABR calls.
*
2-97
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 41
STATION OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION
(PORTS 36 ~ 71)
A
S
4
1
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Port Numbers
Button
CO LED
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
H
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Light LEDs for the port(s) to be restricted.
Port Numbers 36~71
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
NOTE: Ports 72 ~ 95 and 99 on next page. The same notes apply.
2-98
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 41
STATION OUTGOING CALL RESTRICTION
(PORTS 72 ~ 95, AND 99)
A
S
4
1
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Port Numbers
Key
CO LED
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
H
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Light LEDs for the port(s) to be restricted.
Port Numbers 72~95
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 99
NOTE: Port 99 is used to restrict DISA access to CO lines for outgoing calls through the system.
2-99
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 42-0
CO LINE TO PBX/CENTREX CONNECTION
A
S
4
2
H
S
0
SELECT = 0
On-hook
Off-hook
Button (CO
LED Line)
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
H
Z
Z
Specify CO lines by setting
Button/LEDs as defined by
the table below.
Set Button LEDs
CENTREX/PBX
Normal
Connection (LED ON)
(LED OFF)
(36)
(35)
(34)
(33)
(32)
(31)
(30)
(29)
(28)
(27)
(26)
(25)
(24)
(23)
(22)
(21)
(20)
(19)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(15)
(14)
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(09)
(08)
(07)
(06)
(05)
(04)
(03)
(02)
(01)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines.
3. This progam must be utilized to allow CENTREX/PBX (after flash) features to operate.
4. If CO line is programmed for behind CENTREX/PBX (LED ON), reseize guard time is 1.5 seconds. If CO line is
programmed for normal operation guard time is 0.45 seconds. See Program 10-1, Button/LED 02 (Release 2
and higher).
2-100
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 42-1 ~ 8
PBX/CENTREX ACCESS CODES
A
S
4
2
H
S
H
SELECT = 1~8
PBX Access Code Group
Enter the PBX Group
Number 1 ~ 8 that needs
an access code assigned.
Z
Z
ACCESS CODE =
Enter a 2-digit access
code for the group,
as defined by the table
below. See Note 3.
PBX/CENTREX
Outgoing Trunk
Access Code(s)
PBX/CENTREX
Access Code
Number
1st digit
2nd digit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns no access codes to PBX groups.
3. • If access code is single digit, enter the first digit and press Button/LED 01 as
second digit.
• Press Button//LED 01 to delete a digit.
• Press Button/LED 02 for don't care. For example, pressing 8 + Button/LED 02
allows 80 ~ 89.
4. This program must be utilized to allow correct Toll Restriction and CENTREX/PBX
transfer operation.
2-101
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 43
STATION/CO LINE CREDIT CARD CALL ALLOWED (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
(PORTS 00 ~ 35)
A
S
4
3
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Station Port Numbers
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs = CO Lines
Assigned to allow dial 0+ calls with selected stations
Port Numbers 00~35
CO LED 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. For Stations and CO lines enabled in this program: 0+ calls override system toll restriction, and calls will disconnect
automatically if the number of digits set in Program 60-7 is not dialed when "0" is dialed as the first digit. This restricts
the operator from placing calls that would be charged back to the telephone line.
2-102
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 43
STATION/CO LINE CREDIT CARD CALL ALLOWED
(PORTS 36 ~ 71)
A
S
4
3
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Station Port Numbers
CO LED
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
H
Z
Z
Button/LEDs = CO Lines
Assigned to allow dial 0+ calls with selected stations
Port Numbers 36~71
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
NOTE: Ports 72 ~ 95 and 99 on next page. The same notes apply.
2-103
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 43
STATION/CO LINE CREDIT CARD CALL ALLOWED
(PORTS 72 ~ 95)
A
S
4
3
H
S
#
On-hook
Off-hook
SELECT = Station Port Numbers
CO LED
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs = CO Lines
Assigned to allow dial 0+ calls with selected stations.
Port Numbers 72~95
72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 99
NOTE: Notes from page 2-102 apply.
2-104
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 44A
EMERGENCY BYPASS OF FORCED/VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES (RELEASE 3 AND
HIGHER)
A
S
4
4
H
S
H
SELECT = 51, 52, or 53
to set Emergency
Number 1, 2 or 3
Z
Z
DATA = 3- or 4-digit emergency
telephone number
To enter blanks,
Press: Button/LED 01
Example
Emergency Number 1:
5
1
Emergency Number 2:
5
2
Emergency Number 3:
5
3
9
1
1
911 = Initialized Data
9911 (Note 2)
SELECT =
DATA = 3- or 4-digit telephone number
NOTES:
1. The emergency telephone numbers assigned in this program will be sent out the CO line immediately when
dialed; they will bypass the Forced/Verified Account Code dialing restriction.
2. If CO lines are behind PBX or CENTREX, program the PBX/CENTREX outside trunk access code: Example:
"9". A pause is automatically inserted following the first 9. See Programs 42-0 and 42-1 to assign the CO line
and access code for behind PBX/CENTREX operation. Also, if the system CO lines are behind CENTREX/
PBX, the CENTREX/PBX trunk access codes must be programmed in front of the emergency telephone
number. Example: If the CENTREX/PBX access code is ‘9’, then enter 9911 in Program 44-51.
3. If Verified Account Codes assigned in Program 69 conflict (are the same) with emergency telephone numbers
assigned in Program 44A; Program 44A has priority.
4. This feature is for use with Forced (Verified or Nonverified) Account Codes, but not with ABR and DISA. It also
does not override Toll Restriction; emergency numbers must be allowed using system Toll Restriction tables
per normal Toll Restriction programming procedures.
5. Program 44B is related to Toll Restriction and is placed with the other Toll Restriction programs in this
chapter.
2-105
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
Programs 44B through 48 can be found in the
Toll Restriction System Record section.
Programs 50 through 56 can be found in the
Least Cost Routing System Record section.
2-106
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 60
SMDR OUTPUT/ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT LENGTH
A
S
6
0
H
S
H
SELECT = 3 ~ 6 (Item)
Make a selection to indicate
which item is being assigned.
Select 2 for SMDR Threshold Time.
Select 3 for SMDR output.
Select 4 to assign Forced/Voluntary
Account Code digit length, etc.
Description
(R4) 2
SMDR Threshold Time12
0 = 1 second 1 = 10 seconds
SMDR Output when a call is completed.
0 = Outgoing Only 1 = Incoming and Outgoing
4
(R2) 5
10
Z
For “3” SMDR COR = 0 or 1 (Data)
Enter one digit to indicate SMDR output operation.
0 = No Incoming Record
1 = Incoming and Outgoing Record
For “4” ACCOUNT = 04 ~ 15
Enter the number of digits allowed for Forced/Voluntary
Account Codes.The range is 04 ~ 15. Enter two digits.
For “5” TOLL DIAL
Enter one digit (the range is 0 ~ 5).
For “6” DATA = DISA security code; 1 ~ 15 digits.
For "7" CREDIT = Credit Card Digits; 1 ~ 30 digits
Item
3
Z
Data
Forced/Voluntary Account Code Digit Length 04 ~ 15.
(Digits are verified per Prog. 30, Button/LED 14, and Prog. 69)
SMDR Printout options
TIME
(SMDR COR)
(ACCOUNT)
(TOLL DIAL DATA)
Toll Dial = 0
All Calls (Note 7)
= 1
Dial “0” calls only
= 2
Dial “1” calls only
= 3
Dial “00” calls only
= 4
Dial “1”, “0”, calls only
= 5
Dial “1” or “00” calls only
(R2) 6
DISA Security Code 9 (01 ~ 15 digits, may be
changed from station, per Program 30)
(R3) 7
Credit card call digit length, 01 ~ 30 digits (see Program 43)
DATA
~
CREDIT 11
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. For Selection 3, initialized data assigns SMDR output to be enabled for incoming calls that are answered.
3. For Selection 4, initialized data assigns a 6-digit length to all Forced/Voluntary Account Codes.
4. If PBX code is dialed, numbers dialed after the code will be checked.
5. If A/C, O/C or SPCC code begins with "0", "1", or "00", that call will print out.
6. When accessing LCR feature, all digits sent to CO will be output.
7. Selection 3 (printout outgoing call only) is still available.
8. Button/LED 1 = blank, Button/LED 2 = don't care.
9. If a security code is not programmed, outgoing CO line access via DISA will not require a security code
when dialing.
10. See Program 69 for Verified Account Codes (Release 3 and higher).
11. Number of digits required when "0" is the first digit dialed; if this number of digits is not dialed, the system will
disconnect the call after 20 seconds. "0" is counted as a digit. Example: 0 + 1 + 714 + 583 - 3700 = 12
digits; 12 should be programmed as a minimum in this case.
12. Default is 10 seconds.
2-107
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 69
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
000 ~ 024
100 ~ 124
200 ~ 224
A
More Codes
S
6
9
H
S
H
SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN)
NAME
Z
Z
Verified Account Code (1 ~ 15 digits)
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE (1 ~ 15 DIGITS)
VACN
(3-Digit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
_00
_01
_02
_03
_04
_05
_06
_07
_08
_09
_10
_11
_12
_13
_14
_15
_16
_17
_18
_19
_20
_21
_22
_23
_24
NOTES:
1. Account code format
• Account Code digit length is defined in Program 60-4 (4 ~ 15 digits).
• To dial an Account Code, station users must always dial the quantity of digits defined in Program 60-4.
• If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program
60-4, then all digits will be Verified; if the quantity of digits are less, then only those digits will be verified.
2. Account Codes may not conflict (be the same as) emergency numbers in Program 44A.
3. Copy as required.
2-108
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 69
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
025 ~ 049
125 ~ 149
225 ~ 249
A
More Codes
S
6
9
H
S
H
SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN)
NAME
Z
Z
Verified Account Code (1 ~ 15 digits)
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE (1 ~ 15 DIGITS)
VACN
(3-Digit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
_25
_26
_27
_28
_29
_30
_31
_32
_33
_34
_35
_36
_37
_38
_39
_40
_41
_42
_43
_44
_45
_46
_47
_48
_49
NOTES:
1. Account code format
• Account Code digit length is defined in Program 60-4 (4 ~ 15 digits).
• To dial an Account Code, station users must always dial the quantity of digits defined in Program 60-4.
• If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program
60-4, then all digits will be Verified; if the quantity of digits are less, then only those digits will be verified.
2. Account Codes may not conflict (be the same as) emergency numbers in Program 44A.
3. Copy as required.
2-109
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 69
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
050 ~ 074
150 ~ 174
250 ~ 274
A
More Codes
S
6
9
H
S
H
SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN)
NAME
Z
Z
Verified Account Code (1 ~ 15 digits)
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE (1 ~ 15 DIGITS)
VACN
(3-Digit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
_50
_51
_52
_53
_54
_55
_56
_57
_58
_59
_60
_61
_62
_63
_64
_65
_66
_67
_68
_69
_70
_71
_72
_73
_74
NOTES:
1. Account code format
• Account Code digit length is defined in Program 60-4 (4 ~ 15 digits).
• To dial an Account Code, station users must always dial the quantity of digits defined in Program 60-4.
• If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program
60-4, then all digits will be Verified; if the quantity of digits are less, then only those digits will be verified.
2. Account Codes may not conflict (be the same as) emergency numbers in Program 44A.
3. Copy as required.
2-110
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 69
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODES (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
075 ~ 099
175 ~ 199
275 ~ 299
P
More Codes
S
6
9
H
S
H
SELECT = Verified Account Code Number (VACN)
NAME
Z
Z
Verified Account Code (1 ~ 15 digits)
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE (1 ~ 15 DIGITS)
VACN
(3-Digit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
_75
_76
_77
_78
_79
_80
_81
_82
_83
_84
_85
_86
_87
_88
_89
_90
_91
_92
_93
_94
_95
_96
_97
_98
_99
NOTES:
1. Account code format
• Account Code digit length is defined in Program 60-4 (4 ~ 15 digits).
• To dial an Account Code, station users must always dial the quantity of digits defined in Program 60-4.
• If the quantity of digits in a Verified Account Code is the same as the Account Code digit length in Program
60-4, then all digits will be Verified; if the quantity of digits are less, then only those digits will be verified.
2. Account Codes may not conflict (be the same as) emergency numbers in Program 44A.
3. Copy as required.
2-111
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 70
VERIFIED ACCOUNT CODE TOLL RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENTS (RELEASE 3 AND
HIGHER)
(VAC 000 ~ 099)
A
S
7
0
SELECT = Verified Account
Code Number (VACN)
000 ~ 299
H
S
H
DATA = VAC Digit
Restriction Code 0 or 1
Enter 0 for no digit restriction.
Enter 1 for digit restriction.
000 ~ 099
100 ~ 199
200 ~ 299
VACN
_00
_01
_02
_03
_04
_05
_06
_07
_08
_09
_10
_11
_12
_13
_14
_15
_16
_17
_18
_19
_20
_21
_22
_23
_24
_25
_26
_27
_28
_29
_30
_31
VAC Digit
Restrict
Code
VAC
Restrict
Code
VACN
_32
_33
_34
_35
_36
_37
_38
_39
_40
_41
_42
_43
_44
_45
_46
_47
_48
_49
_50
_51
_52
_53
_54
_55
_56
_57
_58
_59
_60
_61
_62
_63
VAC Digit
Restrict
Code
VAC
Restrict
Code
Z
Z
VAC Restrict Code (0 ~ 6)
Enter 0 for No Station Toll Restriction.
Enter 1 for Area Code Toll Restriction.
Enter 2 for Area Code Toll Restriction
and 0 or 1 as 1st or 2nd digit.
Enter 3 for Class 1 Toll Restriction.
Enter 4 for Class 2 Toll Restriction.
Enter 5 for Class 3 Toll Restriction.
Enter 6 for Class 4 Toll Restriction.
VACN
_64
_65
_66
_67
_68
_69
_70
_71
_72
_73
_74
_75
_76
_77
_78
_79
_80
_81
_82
_83
_84
_85
_86
_87
_88
_89
_90
_91
_92
_93
_94
_95
_99
VAC Digit
Restrict
Code
VAC
Restrict
Code
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads 00 for all VACNs.
3. This restriction overrides the normal station restriction assigned in Program 48 when a VAC is entered at the
station. The station resumes its Program 48 restriction after the call is disconnected.
4. Range programming is not available.
5. Copy as required.
2-112
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 77-1
PERIPHERAL OPTIONS
(DOOR PHONES/IMDU/PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU)
A
S
7
7
H
S
1
H
SELECT = 1
LED/
Button
X
LED OFF
Door Lock Time/6 sec.
19 3
Port 28/DDCB4 or HDCB 4
18 3
Port 20/DDCB3 or HDCB 3
17 3
Port 12/DDCB2 or HDCB 2
16
Door Lock Time/3 sec.
3
Port 28/Telephone
3
Port 20/Telephone
3
Port 12/Telephone
3
Port 04/Telephone
Port 04/DDCB1 or HDCB 1
15
—
14
Z
LED/Button
Light the Buttons/LEDs that are marked
with an X in the table below.
LED ON
20
3
Z
7
—
IMDU Modem (Station 19)/Enabled
4
IMDU Modem (Station 19)/Disabled
13 (R3)
8
Tenant 2 (NT2) CO lines-K4/Zone 4
Tenant 1 (NT1) CO lines-K4/Zone 4
12 (R3)
8
Tenant 2 (NT2) CO lines-K3/Zone 3
Tenant 1 (NT1) CO lines-K3/Zone 3
11 (R3)
8
Tenant 2 (NT2) CO lines-K2/Zone 2
Tenant 1 (NT1) CO lines-K2/Zone 2
10 (R3)
8
Tenant 2 (NT2) CO lines-K1/Zone 1
Tenant 1 (NT1) CO lines-K1/Zone 1
Door Phone Ring on Ext Page 5
No Ring over Ext Page
09
08
6
6
07
Door Lock Relay Enabled
06
NT Relay with NT1 or NT2 Button and
ringing CO line.
NT Relay Steady with NT1 Button
05
MOH Relay Enabled
NT Relay Enabled
External Page Relay Enabled
04
—
—
03
—
—
02
—
—
01
—
—
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF.
3. DDCB/HDCB = Door Phone/Lock Control Unit. Up to four DDCBs/HDCBs may be installed in a system. They
must be assigned a PDKU, PEKU or PESU port number to operate (DDCB to PDKU, and HDCB to PEKU or
PESU).
4. If a modem unit (IMDU) is installed on a PIOU or PIOUS, it can be accessed by dialing Station 19.
5. The door phone will ring over external page if the DK system is in the NIGHT mode.
6. This option applies to the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU Door Lock Control 0 assigned to electronic or digital telephone
buttons using Code 71 in Program 39; it does not apply to HDCB Door Lock Control.
7. HDCB4 is available with PCTU (1, 2, 3, and 4), but not with PCTUS DDCB is only available with PCTU4.
8. Assigns Tenants 1 and 2 CO lines to night ring over PIOU external paging zones 1 ~ 4 .(See the Installation
Section , 400-096-208, for more information regarding night ringing over selected paging zones.)
2-113
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 77-2
DOOR PHONE BUSY SIGNAL/DOOR LOCK ASIGNMENTS
A
S
7
7
H
S
2
H
SELECT = 2
LED
Key
Z
LED/Button
Light the LEDs marked with
an X in the table below.
LED ON
LED OFF
One Door Phone Ring
Five Door Phone Rings
19
—
—
18
—
—
17
—
20 (R4)
16 (R2)
X
Z
—
DDCB4/HDCB4 B-jack is Lock Control #4
4
B is connected to Door Phone 4B
15
Door phone 4C Busy Out
No Busy Signal
14
Door phone 4B Busy Out
No Busy Signal
13
Door phone 4A Busy Out
No Busy Signal
12 (R2)
DDCB3/HDCB3 B-jack is Lock Control #3
B is connected to Door Phone 3B
11
Door phone 3C Busy Out
No Busy Signal
10
Door phone 3B Busy Out
No Busy Signal
09
Door phone 3A Busy Out
No Busy Signal
08 (R2)
DDCB2/HDCB2 B-jack is Lock Control #2
B is connected to Door Phone 2B
07
Door phone 2C Busy Out
No Busy Signal
06
Door phone 2B Busy Out
No Busy Signal
05
Door phone 2A Busy Out
No Busy Signal
04 (R2)
DDCB1/HDCB1 B-jack is Lock Control #1
B is connected to Door Phone 1B
03
Door phone 1C Busy Out
No Busy Signal
02
Door phone 1B Busy Out
No Busy Signal
01
Door phone 1A Busy Out
No Busy Signal
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF.
3. HDCB Door Lock Control is available with Release 2 and higher.
4. HDCB4 is not available with PCTUS. DDCB is available only with PCTU4.
5. DDCBs and HDCBs cannot be connected to PSTU ports.
DDCB4 and HDCB Port Assignments
DDCB/HDCB
1
2
3
4
2-114
Port No.
04
12
20
28
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 78
CO LINE SPECIAL RINGING ASSIGNMENTS
DISA/IMDU/NIGHT RINGING OVER EXTERNAL PAGE
A
S
7
8
H
SELECT = Feature Number
Enter Feature Number
1, 2, or 5.
S
H
Code
Enter Code
Number 1~3.
On-hook
Code
1
3
Ring Over External Page 4 during NIGHT mode
1
DISA/DISC CO Line during DAY Mode 5 & 6
2
DISA/DISC CO Line during DAY2 Mode 5 & 6
3
DISA/DISC CO Line during NIGHT Mode
1
Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY Mode
2
Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY2 Mode
3
Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during NIGHT Mode
5
Z
CO Line
Specify CO lines by setting LED/Buttons
as defined by the table below.
All LEDs with an "X" should be
lit when finished.
CO Lines 01 ~ 20
(LED/Buttons)
Feature
Number
2
Z
Feature Description
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
(01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06) (07) (08) (09) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
5&6
Off-hook
CO Lines 21 ~ 36
(LED/Buttons)
Feature
Number
Code
1
3
Ring Over External Page 4 during NIGHT mode
1
DISA/DISC CO Line during DAY Mode 5 & 6
2
DISA/DISC CO Line during DAY2 Mode5 & 6
3
DISA/DISC CO Line during NIGHT Mode5 & 6
1
Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY Mode
2
Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during DAY2 Mode
3
Ring IMDU Maint. Modem during NIGHT Mode
2
5
Feature Description
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
(01) (02) (03) (04) (05) (06) (07) (08) (09) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs off.
3. Shaded table indicates that the handset must be set off-hook during programming.
• Program CO lines 01 through 20 with handset on-hook.
• Program CO lines 21 through 36 with handset off-hook.
4. See Program 77-1 for night ringing configuration.
5. Release 1 provides Direct Inward System Calling (DISC) which enables outside parties to call in on CO lines selected with
this program and dial stations without going through an attendant or operator. Release 2 and higher software provides
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) which enables outside parties to call in on CO lines selected in this program and
access outgoing CO lines, in addition to DISC direct station access. A CRCU must be installed on the PCTU or PCTUS to
support DISA or DISC. See Programs 10-1, 15, 60, 40, 41, 48, and 03 (Code 92 or 93).
6. DISA lines are assigned to Port 99 in Program 30 (Account Codes) and Program 41 (outgoing CO line restriction).
2-115
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 79
DOOR PHONE RINGING
(PORTS 00 ~ 31)
A
S
7
9
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number
Enter the port number having
Door Phone Ringing
assigned.
Feature
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs
Select buttons indicated in the
table below.
Port Numbers 00~31
LED 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Muted ring to busy EKT/DKT6 20
19
18
17
16
15
Door phone 4C Ring
Door phone 4B Ring
Door phone 4A Ring
Door phone 3C Ring
Door phone 3B Ring
Door phone 3A Ring
Door phone 2C Ring
Door phone 2B Ring
Door phone 2A Ring
Door phone 1C Ring
Door phone 1B Ring
Door phone 1A Ring
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Ports 32 ~ 95 on next page. The same notes apply to all ports.
3. Initialized data does not assign door phone ringing to any station port.
All LEDs are OFF.
4. A range of ports may be entered by keying in the following:
*
High port in range
Low port in range
5. Door phones can ring any number of electronic and digital telephones, but do not ring standard
telephones or other devices connected to PESU or PSTU station ports. Standard telephones, though,
can pick up door phone calls ringing digital and electronic telephones.
6. Only the lowest port in a ringing group will receive muted ring tone if all digital telephones (DKTs)
and electronic telephones (EKTs) in the ringing group are busy.
2-116
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 79
DOOR PHONE RINGING
(PORTS 32 ~ 95)
Feature
Port Numbers 32~63
LED 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Muted ring to busy EKT/DKT 6 20
19
18
17
16
15
14
Door phone 4C Ring
13
12
Door phone 4B Ring
11
Door phone 4A Ring
Door phone 3C Ring
10
09
Door phone 3B Ring
08
Door phone 3A Ring
Door phone 2C Ring
07
06
Door phone 2B Ring
05
04
03
Door phone 2A Ring
Door phone 1C Ring
Door phone 1B Ring
Door phone 1A Ring
Feature
02
01
Port Numbers 64~95
LED 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
Muted ring to busy EKT/DKT6 20
19
18
17
16
Door phone 4C Ring
Door phone 4B Ring
Door phone 4A Ring
Door phone 3C Ring
Door phone 3B Ring
Door phone 3A Ring
Door phone 2C Ring
Door phone 2B Ring
Door phone 2A Ring
Door phone 1C Ring
Door phone 1B Ring
Door phone 1A Ring
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
Notes from page 2-116 apply.
2-117
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 80
ELECTRONIC AND DIGITAL TELEPHONE RINGING TONES (CO LINE CALLS)
A
S
8
0
H
S
#
SELECT = Port Number
Enter number of port
having its ringing tone
defined. See Note 4 for
entering a range of ports.
Ringing Tone (Code)
H
Z
Z
Ringing Tone Code
Enter 1 for Tone 1 (500/640 Hz).
Enter 2 for Tone 2 (600/800 Hz).
Port Numbers 00~31
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
Tone 1 (1)
Tone 2 (2)
Ringing Tone (Code)
Port Numbers 32~63
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Tone 1 (1)
Tone 2 (2)
Ringing Tone (Code)
Port Numbers 64~95
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
Tone 1 (1)
Tone 2 (2)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns Tone 1 to all station ports.
3. Tone 1 is 500 Hz modulated with 640 Hz.
Tone 2 is 600 Hz modulated with 800 Hz.
4. A range of ports may be specified by entering:
*
High port in range
Low port in range
2-118
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 8
(1 ~ 9)
CO LINE/STATION RINGING ASSIGNMENTS
(Ports 00 ~ 35)
A
S
8
SELECT = 1 ~ 9
for type of ringing
H
S
#
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs = CO Lines
assigned to ring selected port number(s)
SELECT = Port Number(s)
of station(s) that must ring
Selected CO lines ring selected station ports per ringing program options as follows:
DAY
8 1 Immediate
8 2 12-second delay
8 3 24-second delay
CO LED
DAY 2
8 4 Immediate
8 5 12-second delay
8 6 24-second delay
NIGHT
8 7 Immediate
8 8 12-second delay
8 9 24-second delay
Port Numbers 00~35
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
On-hook
Off-hook
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Ports 36 ~ 71 on next page.
3. Initialized data reads all LEDs ON for Port 00 in Program 81 and port 01 in Program 87; all other LEDs are OFF.
4. If a CO line must call forward or hunt from a station, the line must be assigned to ring at that station only.
5. A range of ports may be selected.
2-119
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 8
(1 ~ 9)
CO LINE/STATION RINGING ASSIGNMENTS
(Ports 36 ~ 71)
A
S
8
SELECT = 1 ~ 9
for type of ringing
H
S
#
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs = CO Lines
assigned to ring selected port number(s)
SELECT = Port Number(s)
of station(s) that must ring
Selected CO lines ring selected station ports per ringing program options as follows:
8 1 Immediate
8 2 12-second delay
8 3 24-second delay
DAY
On-hook
Off-hook
CO LED
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
DAY 2
8 4 Immediate
8 5 12-second delay
8 6 24-second delay
NIGHT
8 7 Immediate
8 8 12-second delay
8 9 24-second delay
Port Numbers 36~71
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
NOTES:
1. Ports 72 ~ 95 on next page.
2. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF.
2-120
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 8
(1 ~ 9)
CO LINE/STATION RINGING ASSIGNMENTS
(Ports 72 ~ 95)
A
S
8
SELECT = 1 ~ 9
for type of ringing
H
S
#
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs = CO Lines
assigned to ring selected port number(s)
SELECT = Port Number(s)
of station(s) that must ring
Selected CO lines ring selected station ports per ringing program options as follows:
Off-hook
On-hook
DAY
8 1 Immediate
8 2 12-second delay
8 3 24-second delay
DAY 2
8 4 Immediate
8 5 12-second delay
8 6 24-second delay
NIGHT
8 7 Immediate
8 8 12-second delay
8 9 24-second delay
Port Numbers 72~95
CO LED 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95
36 16
35 15
34 14
33 13
32 12
31 11
30 10
29 09
28 08
27 07
26 06
25 05
24 04
23 03
22 02
21 01
20 20
19 19
18 18
17 17
16 16
15 15
14 14
13 13
12 12
11 11
10 10
09 09
08 08
07 07
06 06
05 05
04 04
03 03
02 02
01 01
NOTE:
Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF.
2-121
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
System Record Sheets for Programs 90 and 92 are in
the beginning of this section because they must be
executed before any other programs.
2-122
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 93
CO LINE IDENTIFICATION
A
S
SELECT = 1
On-hook
Off-hook
LED
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
CO
Line
(36)
(35)
(34)
(33)
(32)
(31)
(30)
(29)
(28)
(27)
(26)
(25)
(24)
(23)
(22)
(21)
(20)
(19)
(18)
(17)
(16)
(15)
(14)
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(09)
(08)
(07)
(06)
(05)
(04)
(03)
(02)
(01)
9
3
H
S
1
H
Z
Z
CO Line Identification
Enter the CO line identification
(16 alphanumeric characters is the maximum).
See Note 4 for LCD message editing.
BUTTON/LED
Choose the button/LED for
the CO line being named.
See Note 2.
CO Line Identification (16 Characters Max. – Enter One Per Square)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding
the record sheets.
2. Program CO lines 01 ~ 20 by setting LEDs 1 ~ 20
with the handset on-hook. Program CO lines 21 ~ 36
by setting LEDs 1 ~ 16 with the handset off-hook.
3. Initialized data assigns no identification message
to CO lines.
4. Editing buttons include: # to toggle from alphabetic to
numeric;
1 moves cursor to right;
* moves cursor to left;
0 increments letters, etc.
2-123
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 93 (continued)
CO LINE INDENTIFICATION ALPHA/NUMERIC ENTRY
1) Enter Program 93 and select the desired CO line.
2) Use the guide below to enter CO line identification information.
Numeric Mode
“0” to “9” are treated as numerals.
NOTE: Dialpad starts out in Numeric Mode.
Use # key to switch to Alpha Mode.
Alpha Mode
Moves cursor to
right, and starts
special character
entry when in
the Alpha Mode
Moves cursor
to left
QZ
ABC
DEF
1
2
3
GHI
JKL
MNO
4
5
6
PRS
TUV
WXY
7
8
9
Cursor
Left
Scroll
Key
0
Mode
Key
#
*
Changes from
Numeric to
Alpha Mode
and vice versa
Scrolls alpha and
special characters
Alpha Entry (Example):
A
2
B
2
0
C
2
0
Alpha
Character
Special Character Entry:
0
Entry
Sequence
“Q”
1
0
“Z”
1
0
0
“:”
1
0
0
0
“–”
1
0
0
0
0
“+”
1
0
0
0
0
0
“/”
1
0
0
0
0
0
Special
Character
2-124
Entry
Sequence
0
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 97
PRINTING PROGRAM DATA THROUGH SMDR
A
S
9
7
H
S
SELECT = Program number
to be printed on SMDR.
See Note 2 for entering
a range of programs.
#
DATA PRINT
Printout begins.
H
Z
Spkr # # Hold
Cancels printout
at any time.
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Enter a range of programs by keying:
*
High port in range
Low port in range
2-125
Z
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
2-126
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
TOLL RESTRICTION SYSTEM RECORD SECTION
Programs 44B ~ 48
2-127
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 44B
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS (1 ~ 4) OVERRIDE CODES (RELEASE 3 AND HIGHER)
A
S
4
4
H
S
H
SELECT = Toll Restriction
Class 1 ~ 4
Z
Z
DATA = 4-digit Toll Restriction Code
for Selected Class
Code for Toll Restriction Class
1
Code for Toll Restriction Class
2
Code for Toll Restriction Class
3
Code for Toll Restriction Class
4
SELECT =
DATA = 4-Digit Code
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Classes 1 ~ 4 are defined in Program 46.
3. When the Toll Restriction Override code is dialed, the station's class defined in Program 48 will change to the
class assigned to the code in Program 44B.
4. Do not use same codes set in Program 45 (8 and 9).
5. Stations enabled in Program 30, Button/LED 16 ON, are allowed to enter and change Toll Restriction Class (1
~ 4) override codes.
2-128
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 45-1
LCR/TOLL RESTRICTION DIAL PLAN
A
S
4
5
H
S
1
SELECT = 1
H
Z
Z
DATA = Plan 1 ~ 5
Enter Codes 1 ~ 5 to indicate
the dial plan for the system.
Releases 1 and 2
X
Plan
Toll Restriction/LCR
Dial Plans
5
0+ (Note 6)
4
Universal (Note 6)
3
1+AC+NXX/NNX
2
1+AC+NNX/1+NNX
1
AC+NNX/1+NNX
Releases 3 and 4
X
IMPORTANT:
Plan
Toll Restriction/LCR
Dial Plans
5
0+ (Note 6)
4
Universal (Note 6)
3
1+AC+NXX/NNX
2
1+AC+NXX/1+NNX
1
AC+NXX/1+NNX
The correct Dial Plan must be assigned to allow system LCR and/or
Toll Restriction to function properly.
NOTES:
1. Initialized data assigns Dial Plan Code 1 to the system.
2. In NXX and NNX, X = 0 ~ 9, N = 2 ~ 9.
3. NXX = Office code (interchangeable; second digit can be 1 or 0).
4. NNX = Office code (not interchangeable; second digit cannot be 1 or 0).
5. AC = Area Code.
6. 0+, and universal (Codes 5 and 4) are not used in USA.
7. 1+ NNX indicates 1 may be dialed before office codes.
2-129
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 45-2
TOLL RESTRICTION DISABLE
A
S
4
5
H
S
2
SELECT = 2
On-hook
Off-hook
LED
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
CO
Line
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
H
Z
Z
LEDs/Buttons
Specify CO lines by setting
buttons/LEDs as defined by the
table below. All LEDs with an
"X" should be lit when finished.
ON = Disable Toll Restriction
X
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Program CO lines 01 ~ 20 by setting LEDs 01 ~ 20 with the handset on-hook.
Program CO lines 21 ~ 36 by setting LEDs 01 ~ 16 with the handset off-hook.
3. Initialized data reads all LEDs OFF for all CO lines.
2-130
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 45-3 ~ 6
SPECIAL COMMON CARRIER (SPCC) NUMBERS AND AUTHORIZATION CODE DIGIT
LENGTH
A
S
4
5
H
S
H
DATA =
First five digits of the
SPCC Number, or digit
length specified in the
table below. See Note 3.
SELECT = Item 3~6
Enter Item number
3~6 from table below.
Item
Data =
Description
3
SPCC1 Number
4
Authorization Code 1
Digit Length (00 ~ 99)
5
SPCC2
6
Authorization Code 2
Digit Length (00 ~ 99)
Z
1st five digits of SPCC
Number or
Digit Length
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns “00” data to Items 4 and 6, and assigns blank data to Items
3 and 5.
3. When editing,
• Press # to move cursor.
• Press button/LED 01 to delete or leave a blank.
• Press button/LED 02 for don't care.
4. Do not enter a digit length greater than necessary or Toll Restriction may be able
to be defeated.
5. This program is designed for the following special Common Carrier access dialing
sequence: SPCC Number + Authorization Code + Telephone Number. This
program requires only the first five digits of the SPCC Number (950XXXX). SMDR
will print out the following: SPCC Number + ---- + Telephone Number. (The
Authorization Code will not print out, and four dashes will be in its place.)Toll
Restriction will start on the first digit of the Telephone Number.
2-131
Z
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 45-8, 9
TOLL RESTRICTION OVERRIDE CODE
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. When editing the data field, use Button/LED 01 to delete a digit; Button/ LED 02
for don't care.
3. Initialized data leaves code assignments blank.
4. Codes may be revised by station users specified in Program 30, Button/LED 09.
5. Do not use same 4-digit codes set in Program 44B, Toll Restriction/Traveling
Class (1 ~ 4) Override codes. Program 45 (8 ~ 9) overrides Program 44B (1 ~
4) if same codes are used.
2-132
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 46-2 ~ 4
TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED AREA CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS
A
S
4
6
H
S
SELECT = Class Number
Enter Toll Restriction
class number 1 ~ 4.
#
H
2, 3 or 4
Enter one of the
following numbers:
2 = add to memory, 3 = delete
from memory,4# = display
allowed codes in memory.
Z
DATA = Area Codes
Enter or display
area codes.
See Notes 3 and 4.
Class
1
Allowed
Area Codes
Denied
(Check one)
Class
2
Allowed
Area Codes
Denied
(Check one)
Class
3
Allowed
Area Codes
Denied
(Check one)
Class
4
Allowed
Area Codes
Denied
(Check one)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the
instructions preceding the record
sheets.
2. Initialized data includes all area
codes in all classes.
3. A range of area codes
can be entered by pressing:
4. Several ranges or individual area codes may be entered by separating
them with the # button.
5. Tables with deny box checked do not represent memory. All area codes
in memory are allowed.
2-133
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 46-6 ~ 8
TOLL RESTRICTION ALLOWED/DENIED OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY CLASS
A
S
4
6
H
S
SELECT = Class Number
Enter Toll Restriction
Class 1 ~ 4.
H
6, 7 or 8
Enter one of the following
numbers: 6 = add to memory,
7 = delete from memory,
8# = display allowed codes
in memory.
Z
Z
DATA = Office Codes
Enter or display
office codes.
See Notes 3 and 4.
Class
1
Allowed
Office Codes
Denied
(Check one)
Class
2
Allowed
Office Codes
Denied
(Check one)
Class
3
Allowed
Office Codes
Denied
(Check one)
Class
4
Allowed
Office Codes
Denied
(Check one)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the
instructions preceding the
record sheets.
2. Initialized data allows all
office codes in all classes.
3. A range of office codes
can be entered by pressing:
4. Several ranges or individual office codes may be entered by separating
them with a # button.
5. Tables with the denied box checked do not represent memory. All office
codes in memory are allowed.
2-134
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 46-10
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS 1 PARAMETERS
A
S
4
6
H
S
1
0
SELECT = 10
Enter 10 on the
dialpad for Class 1.
LED
X
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs
Light every button/LED marked with
an X in the table below.
LED ON
LED OFF
20
19
18
Table 8 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
17
Table 7 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
16
Table 6 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
15
Table 5 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
14
Table 4 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
13
Table 3 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
12
Table 2 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
11
Table 1 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
03
1 + A/C + 555/AC + 555 Allowed
Per Area Code Restriction
02
01 Restricted
Allowed
01
0 Restricted
Allowed
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF.
2-135
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 46-20
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS 2 PARAMETERS
A
S
4
6
H
S
2
0
SELECT = 20
Enter 20 on the
dialpad for Class 2.
LED
X
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs
Light every button/LED marked with
an X in the table below.
LED ON
LED OFF
20
19
18
Table 8 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
17
Table 7 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
16
Table 6 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
15
Table 5 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
14
Table 4 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
13
Table 3 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
12
Table 2 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
11
Table 1 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
03
1 + A/C + 555/AC + 555 Allowed
Per Area Code Restriction
02
01 Restricted
Allowed
01
0 Restricted
Allowed
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF.
2-136
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 46-30
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS 3 PARAMETERS
A
S
4
6
H
S
3
0
SELECT = 30
Enter 30 on the
dialpad for Class 3.
LED
X
H
Z
Z
BUttons/LEDs
Light every button/LED marked with
an X in the table below.
LED ON
LED OFF
20
19
18
Table 8 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
17
Table 7 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
16
Table 6 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
15
Table 5 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
14
Table 4 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
13
Table 3 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
12
Table 2 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
11
Table 1 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
03
1 + A/C + 555/AC + 555 Allowed
Per Area Code Restriction
02
01 Restricted
Allowed
01
0 Restricted
Allowed
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF.
2-137
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 46-40
TOLL RESTRICTION CLASS 4 PARAMETERS
A
S
4
6
H
S
4
0
SELECT = 40
Enter 4 on the
dialpad for Class 4.
LED
X
H
Z
Z
Buttons/LEDs
Light every button/LED marked with
an X in the table below.
LED ON
LED OFF
20
19
18
Table 8 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
17
Table 7 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
16
Table 6 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
15
Table 5 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
14
Table 4 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
13
Table 3 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
12
Table 2 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
11
Table 1 Area/Office Exception
Not Selected
03
1 + A/C + 555/AC + 555 Allowed
Per Area Code Restriction
02
01 Restricted
Allowed
01
0 Restricted
Allowed
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all LEDs OFF.
2-138
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 47
TOLL RESTRICTION EXCEPTION OFFICE CODES ASSIGNED BY AREA CODE
(TABLES 1 AND 2)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns no office codes to tables.
3. Only one area code may be
entered per exception table.
4. To enter a range of office codes, key in
5. Several ranges or individual office
codes may be entered by separating
them with a # button.
6. Copy as required,
maximum eight exception tables.
2-139
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 48
STATION TOLL RESTRICTION CLASSIFICATION
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data reads "10" for all ports.
3. Port 99 is DISA COS assignment.
4. A range of ports may be entered
2-140
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
LEAST COST ROUTING SYSTEM RECORD SECTION
Programs 50~ 56
2-141
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
LCR CO LINE PROGRAMING
1) Use Program 16 to assign CO lines in groups per the reference chart below.
CO Line Group Reference Chart
CO Lines in
Group (1 ~ 36)
Line Group
CO Line Type/Comments
1 (81)
2 (82)
3 (83)
4 (84)
5 (85)
6 (86)
7 (87)
8 (88)
2) Use Program 40 to allow CO lines access to stations using LCR for outgoing calls.
3) Use Program 41 to deny outgoing CO line access, except for LCR access.
Important: Area code and office code structure must be defined by Program 45-1
(Toll Restriction Dial Plan) for LCR to work properly.
4) Use Program 45-1 to enable the dial plan that is appropriate for the area where LCR calls will originate.
PROGRAM 50-1
LCR PARAMETERS
A
S
5
0
H
S
SELECT = 1
LED
1
2
3
4
5
X
H
1
Z
Z
Press buttons/LEDs for each LCR parameter.
LED ON
Enable System LCR
Not Used
555 LDI Route Per Program 50-4
Dial Tone After LCR Access
Warning Tone Last Choice Route No.
LED OFF
No LCR
Not Used
Per Area Code Table
Silent
No Warning Tone
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Program 40 denies CO line access via LCR and denies all other access methods.
3. Program 41 allows CO line access via LCR, but denies all other outgoing access methods:
(701 ~ 736, 81 ~ 88, CO button).
4. Initialized data: All LEDs OFF.
5. Toll Restricted standard telephones should be forced to dial outgoing calls via LCR. This is to prevent Toll
Restriction defeat when the CRCU times out.
2-142
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 50-2
LCR HOME AREA CODE
A
S
5
0
H
S
H
2
SELECT = 2
Z
Z
DATA = Home Area Code
Enter the local area code.
LCR Home Area Code
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Typically this code is entered in Program 51 table for the LCR route plan number defined for the local calls in
Program 50-5.
3. Initialized data leaves the home area code blank.
PROGRAM 50-31 ~ 35
LCR SPECIAL CODES
A
S
5
0
H
S
H
SELECT = 31 ~ 35
Enter 31 ~ 35 to indicate
the special code.
DATA = Special Code
Enter the code from the table below.
Special Code
Examples
31
1-411
32
911
33
611
34
35
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all codes blank.
3. Press Button/LED 01 to erase data; and leave blank.
4. These calls follow the local call route defined in Program 50-5.
2-143
Z
Z
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 50-4
LCR LONG DISTANCE INFORMATION (LDI) PLAN NUMBER
A
S
5
0
H
S
4
SELECT = 4
H
Z
Z
DATA = LDI Route Plan (1 ~ 8)
Identify the LDI Route Plan
by entering 1 ~ 8.
LDI Plan Number:
(1 ~ 8)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns LDI Plan Number 8.
3. Typically, LDI Plan Number = Local Call Plan Number.
PROGRAM 50-5
LCR LOCAL CALL PLAN NUMBER
A
S
5
0
H
S
5
SELECT = 5
H
Z
Z
DATA = Local Route Plan (1 ~ 8)
Identify the Local Route Plan
by entering 1 ~ 8.
Local Call Plan Number:
(1 ~ 8)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns Plan 8 to be the local call plan.
3. The local plan handles special codes and operator calls.
PROGRAM 50-6
LCR DIAL ZERO TIME-OUT
A
S
5
0
H
S
6
SELECT = 6
H
DATA = Time-out Value
Enter a time-out value from
04 ~ 10 seconds long.
Dial Zero Time-out:
(04 ~ 10 seconds)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns an LCR Dial Zero Time-out value of 06.
3. This value determines pause time before sending a call on to an operator, etc.
2-144
Z
Z
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 51
LCR AREA CODES
A
S
5
1
H
S
H
SELECT = LCR
Action Code:
Plan Number (1 ~ 8) Enter 2 to add code to table.
Enter 3 to delete code from table.
Enter 4# to display codes in table.
LCR
1
Plan
DATA = Area Code(s)
Z
DATA = Area Code(s)
(3 digits)
LCR
3
Plan
DATA = Area Code(s)
LCR
2
Plan
DATA = Area Code(s)
Z
LCR
4
Plan
DATA = Area Code(s)
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves Tables 1 ~ 7 blank; all codes (000 ~ 999) are initialized in Table 8.
3. To enter a range of Area Codes, press
*
Low Area Code
*
#
High
Area Code
Designates
end of string
4. Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with a # button.
2-145
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 51
LCR AREA CODES
A
S
5
1
H
S
H
SELECT = LCR
Action Code:
Plan Number (1 ~ 8) Enter 2 to add code to table.
Enter 3 to delete code from table.
Enter 4# to display codes in table.
LCR
Plan
LCR
Plan
5
DATA = Area Code(s)
LCR
Plan
6
DATA = Area Code(s)
Z
Z
DATA = Area Code(s)
(3 digits)
LCR
Plan
7
DATA = Area Code(s)
DATA = Area Code(s)
000 ~ 999
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves Tables 1 ~ 7 blank; all codes (000 ~ 999) are initialized in Table 8.
3. To enter a range of Area Codes, press
*
Low Area Code
*
#
High
Area Code
Designates
end of string
4. Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with the # button.
2-146
8
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 52
LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE
To assign Office Code Exception Table (1 ~ 4) to an LCR Plan:
more data
A
S
5
2
H
S
SELECT = Office Code
Exception Table (1-8)
Action Code Function
H
Action Code
Z
Z
DATA = (See below)
Action Codes
DATA =
Assign Exception Table to LCR Plan
0
Assign Area Code to LCR Plan
1
3-digit Area Code
Add Office Codes to Exception Table
2
3-digit Office Code
Delete Office Codes from Exception Table
3
3-digit Office Code
Display Office Codes in Exception Table
4
Office Code Exception Table
1
2
3
for Area Code
Office Codes:
for Area Code
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Code Exception Table
4
3-digit Office Code
Office Codes:
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Code Exception Table
# more #
for Area Code
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Code Exception Table
LCR Plan 1 ~ 8
Office Codes:
for Area Code
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Codes:
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all codes blank.
3. To enter a range of office codes, press
*
Low Office Code
*
#
High
Office Code
Designates
end of String
4. Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with the # button.
5. Copy as required, maximum eight Office Code Exception Tables.
2-147
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 52
LCR OFFICE CODE EXCEPTIONS FOR SPECIFIED AREA CODE
To assign Office Code Exception Table (5 ~ 8) to an LCR Plan:
more data
A
S
5
2
H
S
SELECT = Office Code
Exception Table (1-8)
Action Code Function
H
Action Code
Z
Z
DATA = (See below)
Action Codes
DATA =
Assign Exception Table to LCR Plan
0
Assign Area Code to LCR Plan
1
3-digit Area Code
Add Office Codes to Exception Table
2
3-digit Office Code
Delete Office Codes from Exception Table
3
3-digit Office Code
Display Office Codes in Exception Table
4
Office Code Exception Table
5
6
for Area Code
Office Codes:
for Area Code
7
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Code Exception Table
3-digit Office Code
Office Codes:
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Code Exception Table
# more #
for Area Code
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Code Exception Table
LCR Plan 1 ~ 8
8
Office Codes:
for Area Code
Assign to LCR Route Plan Number
Office Codes:
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all codes blank.
3. To enter a range of office codes, press
*
Low Office Code
*
#
High
Office Code
Designates
end of String
4. Several ranges or individual codes can be expressed at once by separating them with the # button.
2-148
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 53
LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENTS
FOR LCR PLAN NO. 1 AND 2
more data
A
S
5
3
H
S
H
SELECT =
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 1
1
1
0
1
2
0
1
3
0
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 2
H M M
Action Code
1
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 1
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 1
LCR Plan
1
0
2
2
0
2
3
0
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
3
1
1
4
2
1
4
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
2
3
1
2
4
2
2
4
1
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
3
2
1
3
3
1
3
4
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 2
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 2
LCR Plan
1st 2nd 3rd Last
H M M
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
1
1
Start TM
H
Action Code
1st 2nd 3rd Last
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
1
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 1
2
LCR Plan
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Z
Start TM or DATA
Start TM
H
LCR Plan
Z
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules.
3. If Schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs
to be entered for Schedule 1.
4. Press Button/LED 01 to erase data (LED does not light).
2-149
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 53
LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENTS
FOR LCR PLAN NO. 3 AND 4
more data
A
S
5
3
H
S
H
SELECT =
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 3
3
1
0
3
2
0
3
3
0
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 4
H M M
Action Code
3
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 3
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 3
LCR Plan
1
0
4
2
0
4
3
0
H M M
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
1
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 4
4
1
1
4
1
2
4
1
3
3
1
2
3
1
3
3
1
4
4
1
4
3
2
1
4
2
1
3
2
2
4
2
2
3
2
3
4
2
3
3
2
4
4
2
4
3
3
1
4
3
1
3
3
2
4
3
2
3
3
3
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
4
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 4
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 4
LCR Plan
1st 2nd 3rd Last
Start TM
H
Action Code
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
1
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 3
4
LCR Plan
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Z
Start TM or DATA
Start TM
H
LCR Plan
Z
1st 2nd 3rd Last
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules.
3. If Schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs
to be entered for Schedule 1.
4. Press Button/LED 01 to erase data (LED does not light).
2-150
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 53
LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENTS
FOR LCR PLAN NO. 5 AND 6
more data
A
S
5
3
H
S
H
SELECT =
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 5
5
1
0
5
2
0
5
3
0
Action Code
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 5
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 5
LCR Plan
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 6
1
0
6
2
0
6
3
0
Start TM
H
H M M
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Action Code
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
5
1
1
6
1
1
5
1
2
6
1
2
5
1
3
6
1
3
5
1
4
6
1
4
5
2
1
6
2
1
5
2
2
6
2
2
5
2
3
6
2
3
5
2
4
6
2
4
5
3
1
6
3
1
6
3
2
6
3
3
6
3
4
5
3
2
5
3
3
5
3
4
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 6
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 6
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 6
LCR Plan
1st 2nd 3rd Last
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
6
LCR Plan
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 5
SELECT
H M M
Z
Start TM or DATA
Start TM
H
LCR Plan
Z
1st 2nd 3rd Last
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules.
3. If Schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs
to be entered for Schedule 1.
4. Press Button/LED 01 to erase data (LED does not light).
2-151
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 53
LCR SCHEDULE ASSIGNMENTS
FOR LCR PLAN NO. 7 AND 8
more data
A
S
5
3
H
S
H
SELECT =
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 7
7
1
0
7
2
0
7
3
0
SELECT
Start TM
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Plan 8
H M M
Action Code
7
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 7
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 7
LCR Plan
1
0
8
2
0
8
3
0
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 8
8
1
1
8
1
2
8
1
3
7
1
2
7
1
3
7
1
4
8
1
4
7
2
1
8
2
1
7
2
2
8
2
2
7
2
3
8
2
3
7
2
4
8
2
4
7
3
1
8
3
1
8
3
2
8
3
3
8
3
4
3
2
7
3
3
7
3
4
Schedule 2
Route Choices
For Plan 8
Schedule 3
Route Choices
For Plan 8
LCR Plan
1st 2nd 3rd Last
H M M
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
1
7
Start TM
H
Action Code
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
1
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
SELECT DATA (Route Choices)
Schedule 1
Route Choices
For Plan 7
8
LCR Plan
( HH = 00 ~ 23
MM = 00 ~ 59)
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
Z
Start TM or DATA
Start TM
H
LCR Plan
Z
1st 2nd 3rd Last
Schedule (1 ~ 3)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
LCR Station
Group No. (1 ~ 4)
(see Program 56)
(Route Definition
No's (1 ~ 4)
From Program 54 )
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns starting time as 0000 and Route Definitions as blank for all schedules.
3. If Schedules 1 & 2 start at the same time, then Time of Day schedule change does not occur, and data only needs
to be entered for Schedule 1.
4. Press Button/LED 01 to erase data (LED does not light).
2-152
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 54
LCR ROUTE DEFINITION TABLES (1 ~ 4)
A
S
5
4
H
S
H
SELECT =
Z
Z
CODE =
Enter Data
SELECT =
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 1
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 2
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 3
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 4
CODE = CO line group and
modified digits table
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
4
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
1
4
2
4
3
4
4
LCR Plan No. (1 ~ 4)
Modified Digits Table 1 ~ 6,
see Program 55
Route Definition Number
CO Line Group 1 ~ 8,
see Program 16
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data is "11".
2-153
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
PROGRAM 54
SEPTEMBER 1992
LCR ROUTE DEFINITION TABLES (5 ~ 8)
A
S
5
4
H
S
SELECT =
H
Z
Z
CODE =
Enter Data
SELECT =
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 5
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 6
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 7
Route Definition Table
for LCR Plan 8
CODE = CO line group and
modified digits table
5
1
5
2
5
3
5
4
6
1
6
2
6
3
6
4
7
1
7
2
7
3
7
4
8
1
8
2
8
3
8
4
LCR Plan No. (5 ~ 8)
Modified Digits Table 1 ~ 6,
see Program 55
Route Definition Number
CO Line Group 1 ~ 8,
see Program 16
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data is "11".
2-154
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
PROGRAM 55
SEPTEMBER 1992
LCR MODIFIED DIGITS TABLES
PROGRAM 55-0 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS – DELETE FROM FRONT
A
S
5
5
H
S
0
SELECT = Modified Digits
Table 1 ~ 6 (six available)
H
Z
Z
FIGURE = Quantity of Digits
(00 ~ 10) to be deleted.
PROGRAM 55-1 and 2 LCR MODIFIED DIGITS – ADD
A
S
5
5
H
S
H
SELECT = Modified Digits Table (1 ~ 6)
Enter 1 to add digits in front of number dialed
Enter 2 to add digits at end of number dialed
Z
Z
CODE = Digits added (up to 22). Enter the
digits to be added. Pauses may be
coded as described in the pause entry
reference table below.
PAUSE ENTRY REFERENCE
(Program 55-1, 55-2)
DELETE DIGITS TABLES
LED
Table No. Quantity of Digits
1
2
3
4
5
6
Quantity 10 Max. (00 ~ 10)
Pause (Seconds) Record Entry Special Buttons
08
07
16
14
P8
P7
06
05
12
10
P6
P5
04
03
02
8
6
4
P4
P3
P2
01
2
P1
Button/LED
11 – Clear
10 – Convert DP to DTMF
ADD DIGIT TABLES
Add to FRONT of Dialed Number ( Program 55-1)
Table No. 1
1
2
3
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Comments
4
5
6
Add to END of Dialed Number (Program 55-2)
Table No. 1
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Comments
3
4
5
6
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data leaves all tables blank except Delete Digits, which are all 00.
2-155
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
PROGRAM 56
LCR STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT
A
S
5
6
H
S
#
SELECT = Port number(s)
Enter port numbers of stations
being assigned. See Note 3
for entering a range of ports.
H
Z
Z
Enter LCR station Group (1 ~ 4)
Port
LCR Station
Port
LCR Station
Port
LCR Station
Port
LCR Station
Number Group No. (1 ~ 4) Number Group No. (1 ~ 4) Number Group No. (1 ~ 4) Number Group No. (1 ~ 4)
00
24
48
72
01
25
49
73
02
26
50
74
03
27
51
75
04
28
52
76
05
29
53
77
06
30
54
78
07
31
55
79
08
32
56
80
09
33
57
81
10
34
58
82
11
35
59
83
12
36
60
84
13
37
61
85
14
38
62
86
15
39
63
87
16
40
64
88
17
41
65
89
18
42
66
90
19
43
67
91
20
44
68
92
21
45
69
93
22
46
70
94
23
47
71
95
NOTES:
1. For more information, see the instructions preceding the record sheets.
2. Initialized data assigns all stations to Group 1.
3. To enter a range of ports, press
4. Refer to Program 53.
2-156
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
This table below shows the program options for stations and CO lines for Verified, Forced and Voluntary Account Code
dialing.
TABLE 2-B
ACCOUNT CODE PROGRAM OPTION MATRIX
Account Code
Program Options
Station
CO Line
Verified
Program 30
LED 14
Forced
Program 30
LED 08
Forced
Program 15-7
CO LED
Verified (Forced)
On
On
On
Verified (Voluntary)
On
On
Off
Verified (Voluntary)
On
Off
On
Verified (Voluntary)
On
Off
Off
Not Verified (Forced)
Off
On
On
Not Verified (Voluntary)
Off
On
Off
Not Verified (Voluntary)
Off
Off
On
Not Verified (Voluntary)
Off
Off
Off
Account Code
Dial Plan
2-157
System
Initialization
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES-INSTRUCTIONS/SYSTEM
RECORDS
SECTION 400-096-302
SEPTEMBER 1992
TABLE 2-C
OVERRIDE OPTION MATRIX
Station A May Override
Station B 1
Executive 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Privacy
Override
Station A
Options
Privacy
Override Block
Station B
Options
3
Station B
Button Options (Program 39)
2
Privacy Release 2
Button
Privacy
Program 30
LED 19
No
Yes
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Yes
No
Yes
On
On
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
No
Yes
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Program 31
LED 18
Privacy
Button
NOTES:
1. Station A attempts to override (Executive or Privacy) Station B.
2. Normally either just a PrivacyÍonÍLine (PRIVACY) or a PrivacyÍRelease (PRVRLS) is assigned to a
telephone (Program 39) depending on how it should operate with Privacy Override.
3. Program 30, Button/LED 18 is ON for Station A, allowing Station A to have executive override to Station B for
some possibilities in this table. If Program 30, LED 18 is OFF for Station A, then it can never executive override
any station.
2-158

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project